JP7314099B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

In some conventional gaming machines, an image display device displays a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4, and when the display mode of the meter reaches level 4, one of a plurality of super reach performances is executed (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-221121 A

However, in Patent Literature 1, only one of a plurality of super reach performances is executed based on the change of the display mode of the meter to level 4, and there is a problem that the game interest cannot be improved.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

The gaming machine of means α is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect, a third suggestive effect, and a fourth suggestive effect as suggestive effects suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
a developed effect execution means capable of executing a first developed effect before the effect result of the first suggested effect is notified, and capable of executing a second developed effect different from the first developed effect after being informed that the control is not performed to the advantageous state as a result of the effect of the second suggested effect;
a chance-up effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect controlled to the advantageous state according to the number of executions during execution of the suggestive effect, with different expectations;
a resurrection special effect executing means capable of executing a resurrection special effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled after the suggestive effect is executed and the effect result is notified that the control is not performed to the advantageous state;
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
It is possible to execute the third suggestive effect after the first development effect is executed,
It is possible to execute the fourth suggestive effect after the second development effect is executed,
The chance-up production execution means is
The chance-up performance is executed such that the number of times the chance-up performance is executed when the third suggestion performance is executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up performance is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed,
The chance-up effect is executed so that the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of the chance-up production including the chance-up production of a specific mode,
When the chance-up effect of a specific mode is executed during execution of the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the suggestive effect,
The first period, which is the period during which the resurrection special effect is executed, is shorter than the second period, which is the period from when it is notified that the control to the advantageous state is not performed as the effect result of the second suggestive effect until the fourth suggestive effect ends,
The revival special effect executing means does not execute the revival special effect when the fourth suggestive effect is executed after the second development effect is executed.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect I) and a first suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect A), a second suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect B), a third suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect), and a fourth suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect E) (e.g., effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in ),
A special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, in the variable display of the super reach η variation pattern as shown in FIG. 11-8, the high-expectation ready-reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect A), and after it is notified that the advantageous state is not controlled as the effect result of the second suggestion effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as the second development pattern ( For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the effect result of ready reach effect B, the ready reach effect E development notification effect is executed) and the development effect execution means (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion performance with the higher expectation than the first suggestion performance after the execution of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed from the time the ready-to-reach performance A is being executed, and the ready-to-reach performance F is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the fourth suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance B, and then the ready-to-reach performance E is executed).
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the execution period length L7 of the high-expectation ready-to-win production development notification production is longer than the execution period length L6b of the ready-to-reach production E development notification production),
The special development effect includes a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered (for example, the blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), a secondary effect which is executed after the primary effect and in which the preceding stage information is visibly displayed (for example, the preceding stage effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and an effect which is executed after the secondary effect and in which the post-stage information with a higher degree of emphasis than the preceding stage information is visibly displayed. including a tertiary production (for example, the latter production shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55),
The period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect I (notification timing of the variable display result), and the reach from the start timing of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect. The length L12 of the period until the end timing of the effect F is set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect E (notification timing of the variable display result)),
The effect period of the second suggested effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of ready-to-win effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of ready-to-win effect A),
moreover,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
The cover portion is provided with predetermined restricting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) for restricting the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion (see FIGS. 31 and 33),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggesting performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to excessively long period until the control to the advantageous state is notified, and when the special suggesting performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to favorably draw the player's attention to the special suggesting performance until the control to the advantageous state is notified, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the following means A. Conventionally, a pachinko game machine, such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-96050, is provided with a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game media, and a guide passage formation unit forming a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage unit to the payout unit. Some were attached to frames.

However, when the screw member for attaching the storage portion or the guide passage forming portion to the game frame or the screw member attached inside the game island comes off and drops into the storage portion or the guide passage forming portion, there is a problem that the screw member is mixed with the game medium into the payout device, and the game medium cannot be paid out normally, the payout device breaks down, or the screw member is paid out to the player together with the game medium.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
The cover portion is provided with predetermined restricting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) for restricting the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion (see FIGS. 31 and 33),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as other matters specifying the invention.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the effect when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the preceding effect and the latter effect. It is an explanatory view showing an image display device. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading announcement effect setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of meter effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the presence/absence of execution of a meter effect and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. 4 is a timing chart showing first to fifth timings in each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of reach effect E development suggesting effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of branch destination suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestive effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestive effect. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of reach effect G development suggesting effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the ready-to-win effect determination ratio at the time of the big hit, (B) is a diagram showing the ready-to-reach effect determination ratio at the time of losing, (C) is a diagram showing a comparison of the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D, (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D in the variation pattern of the super reach θ and the variation pattern of the super reach κ at the time of the big win, and (E) the variation pattern of the super reach θ and the super reach κ at the time of the loss. It is explanatory drawing of the difference of the determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D in a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up production|presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing of the execution possible period of the chance up production|presentation in each ready-to-win production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of the production|presentation which can be performed as a chance up production|presentation. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up effect is executed in each ready-to-win effect and the effect pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in each ready-to-win effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display apparatus in a modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change rate of the display mode of active display in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of execution of a branch destination suggesting effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modified example. It is explanatory drawing of the length of revival production|presentation in a modification. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 19A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 19A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 19A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), (D) is a perspective view of the third cover body, and (E) is a perspective view of the ball stop member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 30. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 30, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 30, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 30; FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 30; (A) is a retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), (C) is a retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the second state, and (D) is a UU sectional view of (C). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the structure of a specific electronic component mounted on a game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component. It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces come close to the winning ball device 6A, and a closed state in which game balls do not enter the second start-up winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being in an open state) by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is on. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left side of the game area and one place above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening so that the game balls can easily enter the big winning opening.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state described later (when the special game based on the start winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big win pattern, for example, "7", actual patterns differ depending on the type of big win described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit", and if a special pattern different from the big win pattern (losing pattern, for example, "-") is stop-displayed, it becomes a "lose". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, control (high open control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening by shortening the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period of changing the normal pattern) than in the normal state, or improving the probability of becoming a "normal pattern hit" in the normal game than in the normal state. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is in the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be "general game" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be "big win" (For example, when the system is reset and the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on). is controlled in the same way as

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to the display or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect using any effect device including part or all of these may be performed.

As a performance executed in accordance with the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started in response to the start of the first special game or the second special game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "lost", the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also called "non-ready-to-win") of the non-ready-to-win combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also referred to as "lost reach"), which is not a big win combination, may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "lost reach").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards include not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (putting it in an ON state), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.).

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special game (including management of suspension), execution of normal game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and may be outputted using any one of the power monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turned on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) may be executed by effect control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in a performance control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and when the special patterns are fluctuating, for example, the fluctuation of the special patterns can be restarted from the state before the stop.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is established in the setting confirmation processing of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, the shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the lost symbols or display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is established in the setting change processing of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the staff member of the game parlor, etc., the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and control to the setting change state is possible. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF or if the setting key 51 is OFF, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is executed while the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is OFF, the recovery process of step S4 is executed while the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of the normal game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41) and control of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as generation of starting winning, the number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big hit'' and the type of the big hit in the case of ``big hit'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". The process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of judging whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state passes, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage. If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows a configuration example of the second special figure display result determination table used when the variation special figure is the second special figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time "short missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". Further, when the set value is 1 and the game state is the variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". It should be noted that when the variable special figure is set to 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7 (B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time "short missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". Further, when the set value is 1 and the game state is the variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". ” is assigned. Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the time saving loss determination value for determining the time saving loss regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the loss judgment value with time reduction is in a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value of the previous set value 6. Since it is set in the range of 7 to 65535, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big win regardless of the setting value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". It is Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within that range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the time saving loss determination value for determining the time saving loss regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and the loss determination value with time reduction is 6531 with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range of 7 to 65425, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set to the common numerical value range that is not included in the time-saving state when the game state is the normal state and the time-saving state. The range of ~65425 is set as a common numerical value range with time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result not including the time saving is a common ratio for any set value, so that gambling property can be prevented from being excessively increased by the set value. Furthermore, with respect to the time saving loss, to which a common determination value number is assigned in each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time saving loss reference value, so that the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of whether the variable display result is the time saving loss can be reduced.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the operation of displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the command (electrical signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is ``missing'', and the value of the performance process flag is updated to ``0'' which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, for example, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic portion 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. The present characteristic portion 029SG includes the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG.

The game machine of form 1 of invention 029SG is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect I) and a first suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect A), a second suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect B), a third suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect), and a fourth suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect E) (e.g., effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in ),
A special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, in the variable display of the super reach η variation pattern as shown in FIG. 11-8, the high-expectation ready-reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect A), and after it is notified that the advantageous state is not controlled as the effect result of the second suggestion effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as the second development pattern ( For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the effect result of ready reach effect B, the ready reach effect E development notification effect is executed) and the development effect execution means (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion performance with the higher expectation than the first suggestion performance after the execution of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed from the time the ready-to-reach performance A is being executed, and the ready-to-reach performance F is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the fourth suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance B, and then the ready-to-reach performance E is executed).
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the execution period length L7 of the high-expectation ready-to-win production development notification production is longer than the execution period length L6b of the ready-to-reach production E development notification production),
The special development effect includes a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered (for example, the blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), a secondary effect which is executed after the primary effect and in which the preceding stage information is visibly displayed (for example, the preceding stage effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and an effect which is executed after the secondary effect and in which the post-stage information with a higher degree of emphasis than the preceding stage information is visibly displayed. including a tertiary production (for example, the latter production shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55),
The period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state. The length L12 of the period until the end timing of the effect F is set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect E (notification timing of the variable display result)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggesting performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to excessively long period until the control to the advantageous state is notified, and when the special suggesting performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to favorably draw the player's attention to the special suggesting performance until the control to the advantageous state is notified, so that the game interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Form 2 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1,
The effect period of the second suggested effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of ready-to-win effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of ready-to-win effect A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the second suggestive effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestive effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, unlike the first suggesting performance, since the second suggesting performance is not executed before the performance result is notified, even if the special developing performance is not executed, the player can surely pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the second suggesting performance is controlled to an advantageous state as the performance result of the second suggesting performance.

A gaming machine according to Mode 3 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 1 or Mode 2,
Development suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect decision process shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the process of determining the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect shown in FIG. After determining execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect in the suggestive effect determination process, a part for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
The development-suggestion production executing means includes:
As the development suggestion effect, a special development suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the special development effect can be executed during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η, a meter effect can be executed during the execution of the ready reach effect A and the ready reach effect B). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, the special development suggestion performance can arouse the player's expectation for execution of the special development performance.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3,
The development effect execution means can execute the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the special suggestion effect is executed without the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the high-expectation reach production development notification production is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the first suggesting performance and the second suggesting performance are not executed, the special development performance is executed and the player can be made to pay attention to whether the highly expected special suggesting performance is executed or not, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Form 5 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
The period from the execution of the special development effect to the execution of the special suggestive effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state is longer than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the execution of the third suggestion effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state. The portion set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by lengthening the period until the notification when the highly anticipated special development effect is executed.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 6 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 5,
Development suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, determines execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect in the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect decision process shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the process of determining the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect shown in FIG. After determining execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect in the suggestive effect determination process, a part for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
The development-suggestion effect executing means can execute a special development-suggestion effect (e.g., meter effect) that suggests execution of the special development effect by changing the effect mode in stages, and a special development-suggestion effect (e.g., development suggestion effect with ready-to-win effect E) that suggests execution of the special development effect by changing the effect mode in stages,
The percentage of the production form changes to a specific number of steps in the special development suggestion of the special development suggestions is higher than the percentage of the production form in the special development suggestion of the special development (for example, as shown in FIG. While the change (6 levels if the state of the meter production is inserted), the reach production E development suggestive production is the part where the display form of the Reach Development images changes 2 steps),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggesting performance in which the special development suggesting performance is executed and the second suggesting performance in which the special development suggesting performance is executed, and in the special development suggesting performance it is easier for the player to change to the specific stage number than in the special development suggesting performance, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not it changes to the specific stage number, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Mode 7 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 6,
The period during which the special development suggesting effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggesting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display of super reach δ and super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggesting effect executable period).
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic, it is possible to suggest that the third suggestive performance, which is more expected than the first suggestive performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed, for a longer period of time than that the fourth suggestive performance is executed after the special development performance is suggested, so that the performance interest of the special development suggestive performance can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 8 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 6 or Embodiment 7,
When the second suggestive effect is executed, the development suggestive effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestive effect until the effect result of the second suggestive effect is notified (for example, the reach effect E development suggestive effect is a portion that can be executed after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the effect result of the ready reach effect B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to the fact that the player is notified that the special development suggestive performance is executed during the execution of the second suggestive performance and that the player is notified that the second suggestive performance is not controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the performance of the second suggestive performance.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 9 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 8,
An advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a chance-up effect) that suggests that the effect result of the suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the suggesting effect, and an advantageous result suggesting effect executing means for making the suggestion according to the number of times of execution of the constituent effects that constitute the advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a portion that executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG.
The number of executions of the composition effect when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times of execution of the composition effect when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect F, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, red display of the ready-to-reach title, movement of the movable body 32, display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promoting image, a total of three effects can be executed (chance-up effect is executed in pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U. possible), while the ready-to-win effect A is being executed, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, a total of two effects of red display of the ready-to-reach title and movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the composition effect when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is equal to or less than the number of times of execution of the composition effect when the second suggestion effect is being executed. , a red display of the ready-to-win title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 can be executed (the chance-up effect can be executed with pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case where the special development performance is executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified and the third suggestion performance is further executed, the number of executions of the composition performance increases when the third suggestion performance is executed rather than when the first suggestion performance is executed, so that the player can preferably pay attention to the performance result of the third suggestion performance, and after it is notified that the performance result of the second suggestion performance is not controlled to an advantageous state, the special development performance is further executed. When the 4 suggesting performances are executed, the number of executions of the composed performances when the 4th suggestive performance is executed is equal to or less than the number of times of execution of the structured performances when the 2nd suggestive performance is executed, whereby it is possible to prevent the players from paying excessive attention to the performance results of the 4th suggestive performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 10 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 9,
The advantageous result suggesting effect executing means can execute the advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, chance up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggesting effect of the common mode is executed, the degree of expectation differs depending on the type of the suggesting effect in which the advantageous result suggesting effect is executed (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-12, the degree of expectation for big win differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the ready-to-win title and the action of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the ready-to-win effects A to F of the ready-to-win effect).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while suppressing an increase in the number of modes of the advantageous result suggesting performance, the player can be made to pay attention to which suggesting performance the advantageous result suggesting performance of the common mode is to be executed during the execution of the advantageous result suggesting performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine according to Mode 11 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 9 or Mode 10,
The suggestive effect executing means can display an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestive effect when executing the suggestive effect, and can change the expectation level corresponding image to a different expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-5, when the characters of the ready-to-win title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, the display mode of the expectation image indicating the degree of expectation for the big win displayed together with the ready-to-win title image is changed. (the part that increases the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the expectation degree corresponding image changes with the execution of the advantageous result suggesting performance, attention to the expectation degree corresponding image can be increased, so that the player can accurately recognize the degree of expectation of the suggesting performance.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 12 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiments 1 to 11,
Specific image suggestion effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modification 029SG-1) that is different from the suggestion effect and is capable of executing a specific image suggestion effect (for example, the active display effect shown in Modification 029SG-1) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image (for example, active display) that is displayed during the suggestion effect. display in any of the display modes, and the degree of expectation for a big hit varies depending on which display mode the active display is displayed),
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion effect as the specific image suggestion effect in any of the different types of the suggestion effects (for example, a portion where the active display can be displayed in a white circle, a blue circle, or a red circle),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestive effect executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is lower than the ratio at which the common specific image suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestive effect executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modification 029SG-1, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is announced before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect A. In the variable display of the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win η that is executed and the ready-to-win effect F is further executed, the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during the ready-to-reach effect A is lower than the rate P3 at which the active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during the ready-to-reach effect F).
The ratio of execution of the common specific image suggestion effect during execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is higher than the ratio of execution of the common specific image suggestion effect during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern. The rate P3 at which the display mode changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is higher than the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect E in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach effect E, in which after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and then the ready-to-reach effect E is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggesting performance is executed and the third suggesting performance is executed, the risk of the player recognizing in advance that the third suggesting performance will be executed by executing the specific image suggesting performance before the start of the special development performance can be reduced, and since the common specific image suggesting performance is appropriately executed in accordance with the degree of expectation between the third suggesting performance and the fourth suggesting performance, the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 13 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 12,
The specific image suggesting effect executing means can change the display form of the specific image from a first form (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to any one of a plurality of forms including a second form (for example, a red circle) with a higher degree of expectation than the first form,
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development effect is executed. The display mode of the active display is set higher than the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or blue circle to a red circle, and in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ζ, the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect E is set higher than the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and reduce the risk of lowering the interest in the game due to the player preliminarily recognizing that the degree of expectation is high due to the change of the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the development performance.

A gaming machine according to Mode 14 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 12 or Mode 13,
The development effect execution means can execute the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the special suggestion effect is executed without the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed from the timing before the ready-to-reach effect A and the ready-to-reach effect B are not executed).
In the third development pattern, the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape before the start of the ready-to-win effect I. is set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the ready-to-win effect I),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the special suggestive effect, the player can easily recognize that the special suggestive effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 15 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 12 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display,
Reservation storage means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) capable of storing information related to the variable display as a reservation storage;
Determination means (for example, a portion for CPU 103 to perform variation pattern setting processing shown in FIGS. 11 to 17) capable of determining that the development effect is to be performed when starting variable display;
For the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage, determination means capable of determining that the development effect will be executed before the determination means is determined (for example, in the winning random number value determination process of modification 029SG-4, when the CPU 103 determines that the variation pattern (variation category) is super ready, which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ (a portion that determines which one of reach effect A to reach I is to be executed during variable display);
with
The specific image suggesting effect executing means can execute, as the specific image suggesting effect, based on the determination result of the determining means, an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed, and an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed. A part that can suggest which reach effect will be developed among the effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggesting effect before the start of the variable display, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the game machine of the first aspect of invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot game state),
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect I), a first suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect C), a second suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect D), and a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect G) as the suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10). and
Before the performance result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified, the special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-win effect D), and after the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is executed and it is notified that the effect result is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ, a variable display result (loss) is notified as a result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D. After that, the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect is executed);
In the first development pattern, a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIG. 11-9) before the special development effect is executed;
with
The degree of expectation differs between the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the ready-to-win effect D has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win effect C),
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the special suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D, and the ready-to-reach performance I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the special suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach θ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D, the ready-to-reach performance G development notification performance is executed, and then the ready-to-reach performance G is executed).
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestive effect that is different from the special suggestive effect and the special suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed, and the ready-to-win effect H is further executed).
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, that is, when the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, the determination ratio of the super reach κ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is performed during variable display is determined. Part higher than the determined percentage of the big hit variation pattern (PB1-7)),
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, the execution period length L7 of the high-expectation ready-to-win production development notification production is set longer than the execution period length L8 of the ready-to-win production G development information production),
The special development effect includes a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered (for example, the blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), a secondary effect which is executed after the primary effect and in which the preceding stage information is visibly displayed (for example, the preceding stage effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and an effect which is executed after the secondary effect and in which the post-stage information with a higher degree of emphasis than the preceding stage information is visibly displayed. including a tertiary production (for example, the latter production shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55),
The rate at which the special development effect is executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the first suggestion effect is different from the rate at which the special development effect is executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the second suggestion effect. After that, the part that is higher than the rate at which the high-expectation reach production development notification production is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance can be diversified by combining the types of suggestive performances and the types of developmental performances, and a prescribed relationship can be given to the suggestive performances and the developmental performances, so that the performance interest of the suggestive performances and the developmental performances can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 1,
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect execution means can execute a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
Equipped with a development preliminary performance execution means capable of executing a development preliminary performance before the execution of the special development performance or the specific development performance (for example, a portion in which the preliminary performance is executed from the timing before the ready-to-reach performance H development notification performance in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι, and a portion in which the preliminary performance is executed from the timing before the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
The advanced preliminary effect executing means can execute the common advanced preliminary effect when the special developed effect is executed and when the specific developed effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51, a portion where a common mode of preliminary effect is executed between the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution of the pre-development performance increases the attention to the development performance, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the special development performance or the specific development performance is executed as the development performance, thereby improving the game interest.

A gaming machine according to Mode 3 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 1 or Mode 2,
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect execution means can execute a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A special development suggestion effect that suggests execution of the special development effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern Z that displays a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5), a specific development suggestion effect that suggests execution of the specific development effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect that displays a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5), and a common development suggestion effect that suggests execution of both the special development effect and the specific development effect (for example, on the image display device 5). a branch destination suggestive effect of pattern X displaying a branch destination suggestive image 029SG005X);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the special development suggesting performance, the specific development suggesting performance, and the common development suggesting performance is executed as the development suggesting performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3,
A second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern, is smaller than the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in 11-30(D), expectations are high before the performance result is reported as the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D. With respect to the super ready-to-reach κ variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach performance development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance I are executed, and the variation pattern of the super ready-to-reach θ in which the ready-to-reach performance G developmental notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D, when the variable display result is a big hit, the difference between the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach performance C and the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach performance D in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ is 60%. The portion where the difference between the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect C and the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of θ is 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to guess whether the first development pattern in which the special development performance is executed or the second development pattern in which the special development performance is executed, depending on which one of the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance is executed, so that attention can be paid to which of the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Form 5 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
The rate at which the first suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or substantially the same (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the execution determination ratio of ready-to-win effect C and the execution determination ratio of ready-to-win effect D are the same).
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic, even when the first suggesting performance is executed or the second suggesting performance is executed, the second development pattern in which the special development performance is executed can be expected, so that the game interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 6 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 or Embodiment 5,
The degree of expectation when the first suggested effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the degree of expectation when the second suggested effect is performed in the second developed pattern (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the expected degree of big win when execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined and the degree of expectation to big win when execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined are the same).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggesting performance is executed or the second suggesting performance is executed, when the special development performance is executed, it is possible to similarly expect to be in an advantageous state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 7 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 6,
Advantageous result suggesting effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a first advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect) that suggests that the effect result of the first suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the first suggesting effect, and a second advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, the branch destination suggesting effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the second suggesting effect (for example, the chance-up effect determining process performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11-31). A portion that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the chance up effect);
Development suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect decision process shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the process of determining the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect shown in FIG. After determining the execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect in the suggestive effect determination process, a part for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10);
with
The ratio at which the development suggestive effect is executed when the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the ratio at which the development suggestive effect is executed when the second suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-6, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, it is possible to determine whether or not the branch destination suggestive effect is executed at a different rate depending on whether the ready-to-win effect to be executed is the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the development suggestive performance suggesting the execution of the special development performance is different between the first suggestive performance and the second suggestive performance, it is possible to favorably suggest that the development suggestive performance will be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 8 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 7,
Advantageous result suggesting effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a first advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect) that suggests that the effect result of the first suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the first suggesting effect, and a second advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, the branch destination suggesting effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the second suggesting effect (for example, the chance-up effect determining process performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11-31). A portion that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the chance up effect);
Development suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect decision process shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in the process of determining the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect shown in FIG. After determining the execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect in the suggestive effect determination process, a part for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10);
with
When the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern, the rate at which the first suggestive result suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestive effect is different from the rate at which the second suggestive result suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestive effect in the case where the second suggestive effect is executed in the first developed pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. With regard to the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect I are executed before being notified, whether or not to execute the chance-up effect can be determined at a different rate depending on whether the ready-to-reach effect C is determined or the ready-to-reach effect D is determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the first and second advantageous result suggesting performances suggesting that the performance result will be advantageous is different between the first suggesting performance and the second suggesting performance, the performance result can be favorably suggested, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Mode 9 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 7 or Mode 8,
If the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect execution means can execute a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
As for the degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggesting effect and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggesting effect, the relationship that the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed after the execution of the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is higher than the relationship that the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed after the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. In other words, the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern are determined according to whether or not the reach effect G to the reach effect I develops after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and which of the reach effect G to the reach effect I develops).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the suggestion by the first special development performance and the second special development performance is greatly related to the execution of the specific development performance or the special development performance close to the execution time of the first special development performance or the second special development performance, the execution of the first special development performance and the second special development performance can increase the attention to the specific development performance or the special development performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 10 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 7 to 9,
If the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect execution means can execute a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed is different before and after the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-12, the portion where the expectation of big win differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the ready-to-win title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the ready-to-win effects A to F to the ready-to-win effect).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect, thereby increasing attention to whether the first development pattern or the second development pattern will occur.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 11 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 7 to 10,
As the notification mode of the effect result in the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, there is a first report mode in which it is simply reported that the advantageous state is not controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach γ, the variable display result is reported as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D and the variable display ends), and a second report in which it is reported that the control to the advantageous state will be performed after it is once reported that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. A mode (for example, a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) in which, after once reporting that the variable display result is a loss as the performance results of the reach performance A to the reach performance D shown in the modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is again reported as a big hit),
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed when the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed in the case where the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-reach effect as shown in modification 029SG-7. A part where the proportion of the branch destination suggestive effect executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the effect D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the ratio of the branch destination suggestive effect executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect are reported in the second notification mode, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise, and the processing for determining the execution of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect can be made common between the case where the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is reported in the first reporting mode and the case where the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is reported in the second reporting mode, so that the amount of data required for the processing can be reduced. I can.

A gaming machine according to Mode 12 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Modes 7 to 11,
As the notification mode of the effect result in the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, there is a first report mode in which it is simply reported that the advantageous state is not controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach γ, the variable display result is reported as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D and the variable display ends), and a second report in which it is reported that the control to the advantageous state will be performed after it is once reported that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. A mode (for example, a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) in which, after once reporting that the variable display result is a loss as the performance results of the reach performance A to the reach performance D shown in the modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is again reported as a big hit),
When the special development performance is executed after the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance to the case where it is reported that the suggestion performance executed after the special development performance is controlled to the advantageous state is the ratio of the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance to the case where the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the second notification mode. 2 Different from the rate at which the advantageous result suggesting effect is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 029SG-8, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after it is notified that the variable display result is lost as the effect result of these reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result is a big win as the effect result of the reach effect G (super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (P B1-7) when the variable display is executed), the ratio of executing the chance-up effect during the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the variable display in which the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic, when the first suggesting performance or the second suggesting performance is executed, the ratio of execution of the first advantageous result suggesting performance or the second advantageous result suggesting performance can be varied depending on whether or not the special development performance is executed before the control to the advantageous state is notified, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Mode 13 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Modes 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggesting effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of advantageous result suggesting effects including the first advantageous result suggesting effect and the second advantageous result suggesting effect (e.g., pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z branch destination suggesting effects),
The execution ratio of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggesting effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, depending on which of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z the branch destination suggesting effect is executed, the execution ratio of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect differs),
During execution of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect, if the special advantageous result suggestive effect or the special suggestive effect with the highest execution ratio of the special development effect is executed and the special suggestive effect is not executed, the effect result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect being executed will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-9, the high expectation reach effect development report even though the branch destination suggestive effect was executed in the effect pattern Z). When the knowledge performance is not executed or when the ready-to-reach performance I is executed although the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance is not executed, it is reported that the variable display result will be a big hit),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special development performance is executed when the special advantageous result suggestive performance or the special suggestive performance is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 11-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 029SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 11A is only an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a decoration pattern (also called a performance design) variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), different EXT data is set according to the determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is “loss” or “jackpot”, or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be when the variable display result is “jackpot”.

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the variable probability control is performed, and the command 9501H is the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which the time reduction control is performed but the variable probability control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-low base state, no time-shortening probability-variable state) while the time-shortening control is not performed while the probability-variable control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the fourth game state-designating command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-shortening probability variable state) in which both the time-saving control and the probability-variable control are performed.

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of times of execution of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal opening big winning state and the high speed opening big winning state to be described later.

Command B100H is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the start winning (first start winning) is generated. Command B200H is a second starting winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) being generated.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is established, for example. The second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, for example. Also, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted corresponding to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is established (when the number of reserved memories is reduced).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the type of the big win (probability variation or non-probability variation) as a winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and commands different from these commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls in each prize opening, a gate passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the variable probability control or the time reduction control is executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in this characteristic portion 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the random number MR4 for normal figure display result determination are controlled to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103, for example, using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, by updating various numerical data by software, it may be possible to count numerical data indicating a part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as a ``jackpot'' to a big win game state, and takes a value in the range of, for example, ``1'' to ``65536''. The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "jackpot" to any one of ``probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', ``probability variable jackpot C'', and ``non-probability variable jackpot'', and takes a value in the range of ``1'' to ``100'', for example.

A random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is a random number value used for determining one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and takes a value in the range of, for example, ``1'' to ``997''.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is a random value used for determining whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is ``win in normal pattern'' or ``lost in normal pattern'', and takes a value in the range of, for example, ``3'' to ``13''.

FIG. 11-3 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 029SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a separate special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a table referred to for determining, based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" to a big hit game state before deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special figure display result determination table in the present characteristic part 029SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state).

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is the judgment data assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big win game state as a ``jackpot''. In the special figure display result determination table in the characteristic part 029SG, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of ``jackpot''. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "big hit" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) is determined to be controlled to the big hit game state (about 1/300 in this feature part 029SG). 1/30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state), the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big win game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big win game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

FIG. 11-4(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 029SG is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types based on a random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control to a jackpot game state with the special figure display result as ``big win''. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that is variablely displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is "non-probability variable big hit", "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot C".

Here, when the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 029SG is described using FIG. A ``variable probability big hit C'' that shifts to a low probability base state and a ``non-variable probability big hit'' that shifts to a low probability high base state after only time reduction control is executed after the end of the big winning game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big win game state by ``probability variable big win B'' is a normal open big win in which rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated five times (so-called five rounds). The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the big win game state by the ``non-probable variable big win'' is a normal opening big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Therefore, the ``variable probability big hit A'' may be called a 10 round (10R) probability variable big hit, the ``variable probability big hit B'' may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit, and the ``variable probability big hit C'' may be called a 2 round (2R) probability variable big hit.

The high-accuracy control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is any one of the variable probability big win A to C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the big win game state, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive game state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state due to the ``non-probable variable big win'' ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 029SG) or when the big win game state is entered before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, the allocation of the determination value to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. That is, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot type of "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" with a small number of rounds. With such a setting, when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A, and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. It is possible to vary the ratios determined for the hit B" and the "potential variable jackpot C". In particular, in a special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a big hit state with a small number of rounds as "variable probability big win B" or "variable probability big win C", so for example, in a game state where game balls easily enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, high opening control accompanying time saving control is performed. has become

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the allocation of the determination value to the "non-probability" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "probable variable big hit B" and "probable variable big hit C" differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine than when it is a special game.

Incidentally, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit types of ``variable probability big hit B'' and ``variable probability big hit C''. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special pattern, a judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special game of the first special pattern may be assigned to the jackpot types of ``variable probability big hit B'' and ``variable probability big hit C''. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-5 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 029SG. In this characteristic part 029SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of cases in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is ``non-reach'' and ``reach'' among the cases in which the variable display result is ``loss'', and corresponding to the case in which the variable display result is ``big win''. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach-loss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this characteristic portion 029SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, 11 types of super reach variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, super reach κ, and super reach λ.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this characteristic part 029SG is a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach β, and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach γ. a variation pattern (PA2-4) that results in a deviation, a variation pattern (PA2-5) that results in a failure as a variation pattern for super reach δ, a variation pattern that results in a failure in the variable display result (PA2-6) as a variation pattern for super reach ε, a variation pattern (PA2-7) that results in a failure in the variable display result as a variation pattern for super reach ζ (PB1-5), and a variation pattern (PB1) that results in a big hit as the variation pattern for super reach η. -6), a variation pattern (PA2-9) that deviates from the variation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), a variation pattern (PA2-10) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach ι (PA2-10), and a variation pattern (PB1-9) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach κ There are provided a variation pattern (PA2-11) that results in a deviation, and a variation pattern (PB1-10) that results in a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach λ and a variation pattern (PA2-12) that results in a deviation.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 029SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for big hit becomes high, the degree of expectation for big hit becomes higher as the special-figure fluctuation time is longer in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern except for some exceptions.

In particular, the special figure variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach α variation pattern, the special figure variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach β variation pattern, the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach ε variation pattern is the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach ζ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach ε variation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach κ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach ι variation pattern.

Of these super reach α fluctuation pattern to super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern are not provided with a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a big win. In other words, for these super reach α fluctuation pattern to super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the super reach α fluctuation pattern has the shortest special figure fluctuation time and the lowest big hit expectation for the fluctuation patterns excluding the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 029SG, a super reach λ variation pattern is provided as a super reach variation pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the super reach κ variation pattern. In the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the special figure fluctuation time is exceptionally set to be longer than the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 029SG, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7(A), the super reach α variation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) is a variation pattern in which a reach effect A with an execution period length of L1 is executed as a reach effect of super reach during variable display, and a variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect A. As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7(B), the super reach β variation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) is a variation pattern in which a ready-to-reach effect B having an execution period of L2 (L2>L1) is executed as a super-reach ready-to-reach effect during variable display, and a variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B), the super reach α variation pattern and the super reach β variation pattern are also variation patterns that can execute a meter effect suggesting execution of a high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect over the period from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification timing of the variable display result). As described above, the length L2 of the execution period of the ready-to-win effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the ready-to-win effect A, so the length L5 of the meter effect executable period in the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the length L4 of the meter effect executable period in the super reach α fluctuation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7(C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is executed as the ready-to-reach effect of the super-reach during the variable display, and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D. Both the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D are set to the length L3 in the execution period. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern determines which of the ready-to-reach performance H development notification performance to notify that the ready-to-reach performance H will be further executed after the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D during the execution period of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D, and the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development information performance to notify that either the ready-to-reach performance F or the ready-to-reach performance I will be executed (to which reporting performance to branch). It is also a variation pattern that can execute a suggested branch destination suggestion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7(D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) executes the reach effect B with the length of the execution period L2 as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display, and after notifying that the variable display result is wrong, the reach effect E development suggestive effect suggesting development to the reach effect E can be executed (the length of the reach effect E development suggestive effect executable period: L6a), and finally develops into the reach effect E. This is a variation pattern that notifies a deviation. Like the super reach β variation pattern, the super reach δ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the ready reach performance (the length of the meter performance executable period: L5), and the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8(E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) executes a reach effect C or a reach effect D (the length of the execution period of either reach effect is L3) as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display, and after announcing that the variable display result is lost, it is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggesting effect that suggests the development to the ready-to-reach effect G, and ultimately the change is reported without developing to the ready-to-reach effect G. It is a known fluctuation pattern. In addition, the super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggestive presentation can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-reach presentation C and the ready-to-reach presentation D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) executes a reach effect B with an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display, and after informing that the variable display result is wrong, a reach effect E development suggesting effect can be executed, and further a reach effect E development notification effect (ready reach effect E development notification effect) to notify that the reach effect E will develop. Execution period length: It is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed after executing L6b). The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (the length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the ready reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect executable period. The execution period length L6b of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. Also, in the super reach ζ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the ready reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (notification timing of variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8(G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes a ready-to-reach effect A as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach during the variable display, and replaces the ready-to-win effect A from the middle of the ready-to-win effect A with a high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect that notifies that the ready-to-win effect develops into a high-expectation ready-to-win effect (reach effect F or ready-to-win effect I, which will be described later in the case of this characteristic part). It is a variation pattern in which the hit effect E development notification effect is executed over a period of time L7 (L7>L6b) longer than the execution period L6b, and the ready-to-win effect F is executed. The super reach η variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing at which the ready-to-win performance A is switched to the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance (since the ready-to-reach performance A is switched to the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance in the middle, the length of the meter performance executable period is L4' shorter than L4). Also, in the super reach η variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development reporting performance to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance F (the timing of reporting the result of variable display) is set to L12 (L12>L11) longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the development reporting performance E to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance E in the super reach ζ variation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) executes a reach effect C or a reach effect D (the length of the execution period of either reach effect is L3) as a reach effect of the super reach during the variable display, and after notifying that the variable display result is lost in the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development suggesting effect can be executed, and further the reach effect G can be executed. It is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win performance G development notification performance for informing the development is executed over a short period L8 (L7>L8) shorter than the execution period length L7 of the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development reporting performance, and further the ready-to-win performance G is executed. Also, the super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggesting presentation can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-reach presentation C and the ready-to-reach presentation D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super ready-to-reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) executes a ready-to-reach effect C or a ready-to-reach effect D as a ready-to-reach effect of the super reach during the variable display, executes a preliminary effect and a sign effect instead of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D from the middle of the ready-to-reach effect C or D, and furthermore, a ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect to notify that the ready-to-reach effect H will develop. It is a variation pattern that executes and executes the ready-to-win effect H. Also, the super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggestive effect can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9(J), the super reach κ variation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) executes a reach effect C or a reach effect D as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display, executes a preliminary effect and a sign effect in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and further executes a high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect whose execution period is L7. It is a variation pattern for executing reach effect I. Also, the super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggesting presentation can be executed during the execution period of the reach presentation C and the reach presentation D. In addition, in the super reach κ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development information performance start timing to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance I (notification timing of variable display result) is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11) longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development information performance to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance F in the super reach η variation pattern.

A super reach λ variation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a variation pattern for executing a ready-to-reach performance I by executing a high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance having an execution period length of L7 from the timing before the ready-to-reach in other super-reach variation patterns during variable display. Note that the super reach λ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high-expectation ready-reach effect development notification effect (since the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the timing before the reach, the length of the meter effect executable period is L4'': L4>L4'>L4'', which is even shorter than L4'). Also, in the super reach λ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the ready reach performance I (notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11) like the super reach κ.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in the present characteristic portion 029SG includes a blackout effect in which the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is made difficult to see by darkening the display area of the image display device 5, a pre-stage effect in which the image display device 5 displays a preceding line after the blackout effect, a switching effect after the pre-stage effect, and an image display device 5 after the switching effect. A post-stage performance of displaying a post-speech and a movable-body performance of dropping (operating) a movable body 32 from an origin position above the image display device 5 to a performance position overlapped with a substantially central position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5 after the post-stage performance are executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the pre-stage production is a production in which the contents of the words spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed as a character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the rear-stage production is a production in which, following the front-stage production, the content of the lines spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the line in the first stage is "You're not alone... I'll show you everyone's power!", and the line in the second stage is "Miracle attack!".

More specifically, the pre-stage effect consists of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the words "I am not alone..." are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the seven characters "I am not alone..." are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the second period, the words "I'll show you everyone's power!" Further, the latter stage effect is also composed of the first period and the second period, and in the first period, the words "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the four characters "Miracle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加In the second period, the words "Attack!" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five characters "Attack!"

That is, in the front-stage performance and the rear-stage performance in this characteristic part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the front-stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the rear-stage performance, and the number of characters displayed in the second period of the front-stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the rear-stage performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the display mode of the lines in the first-stage production is different from the display mode of the lines in the second-stage production.

For example, in the pre-stage effect, the background screen and character images of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 made up of a plurality of characters (for example, "I'm not alone...") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) in the first period. ). In addition, after the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone... I'll show everyone's power!") is displayed in the largest and brightest manner, it is displayed in a gradually smaller and darker mode (fade-out), and finally disappears. Note that the character image 029SG007 may move while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the second-stage production, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter mode than in the first-stage production, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", and "ru") consisting of one character are displayed (dynamically displayed) so as to rotate from the right side of the display screen sequentially toward the center (frame-in) (dynamic display) in the first period. , “Q”, and “!”) are displayed (dynamically displayed) so as to rotate (frame-in) and move from the lower side of the display screen toward the center in the second period. In addition, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, ``Miracle Attack!'') are displayed in the largest size and brightest, they are displayed in a mode (frame-out) in which they move so as to spread radially toward the surroundings and finally disappear outside the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the character image 029SG007 in the front stage effect is small, planar (two-dimensional), slow in movement (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and displayed with low brightness. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the latter stage effect is larger than the character image 029SG007 in the former stage effect, is three-dimensional (three-dimensional), has a faster movement (speed of change in display mode due to frame-in (moving speed)), and is displayed with high brightness (see FIG. 11-55).

If the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the post-stage presentation are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the pre-stage presentation, the size and brightness of a part of the character image during fade-in and frame-in may be reversed. Also, although the contents of the lines are different between the front stage production and the rear stage production, at least part of the contents may be common.

In this way, it can be said that the larger the size of the character image constituting the serif is, the higher the degree of emphasis is, the higher the degree of emphasis is when the image is three-dimensional than when it is two-dimensional, the faster the movement is, the higher the emphasis is than the slow movement, and the higher the brightness, the higher the degree of emphasis is. In the above description, the degree of emphasis of the character image in the latter stage is higher than that in the former stage. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the above, the degree of emphasis may include, for example, a thicker character is higher than a thinner character, and a higher color saturation or brightness is higher than a lower color. Furthermore, not only the display mode of the character image itself, but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to enhance the degree of emphasis.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic part 029SG. In this characteristic part 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach γ jackpot). ), PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (variation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1-9 (variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot), PB1-10 (variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot).

In addition, when determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the determination ratio of PB1-1 (variation pattern of the normal reach big hit) is set to the lowest, PB1-2 (variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (variation pattern of the super reach ζ jackpot), PB1- 6 (variation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1-9 (variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot), PB1-10 (variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot) may be set so as to increase the determination ratio in order (Determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when selecting the jackpot variation pattern determination table: PB1-2 < PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5<PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined using the same big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the big win type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for the big win, which differs depending on the type of the big win. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that can be easily determined for each big win type, so that the player can be made to pay attention to which variation pattern the variable display result is a big win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display result is "lost" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the fluctuation special figure is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss. PA2-4 (Variation pattern of super reach γ), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of super reach δ), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of super reach ε), PA2-7 (Variation pattern of super reach ζ), PA2-8 (Variation pattern of super reach η), PA2-9 (Variation pattern of super reach θ), PA2-10 (Variation pattern of super reach ι), PA2- 11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation) and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table B for loss. PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ), PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach δ), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ε), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of super reach θ), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ι), PA2- 11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation) and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table C for loss. PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ), PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach δ), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ε), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of super reach θ), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ι), PA2- 11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation) and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In addition, if the variable display result is "missing" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table D for loss to set the variation pattern PA1-4 (time saving shortening variation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach α loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β loss variation pattern), PA2-4 ( Super reach γ deviation), PA2-5 (Super reach δ deviation deviation), PA2-6 (Super reach ε deviation deviation pattern), PA2-7 (Super reach ζ deviation deviation pattern), PA2-8 (Super reach η deviation deviation pattern), PA2-9 (Super reach θ deviation deviation pattern), PA2-10 (Super reach ι deviation deviation pattern), PA2-11 (Super reach κ deviation deviation pattern) ) and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In other words, when the variable display result is "missing" in the present characteristic portion 029SG, the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of the normal non-reach loss. It is possible to shorten the period until the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is determined using the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D, the determination ratio of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1 for loss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-2 for loss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-3 for loss variation pattern determination table C, and PA1-4 for loss variation pattern determination table D) is set to the highest, PA2-1 (normal reach loss variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α is deviation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β deviation variation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ deviation deviation pattern), PA2-5 (super reach δ deviation deviation variation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε deviation deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation variation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation deviation pattern), PA2-9 (super reach θ deviation deviation pattern), PA2-10 (Variation pattern of missing super reach ι), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach κ), PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach λ) may be set so that the determination ratio is lowered in order (Decision ratio of each super reach variation pattern when selecting the losing variation pattern determination table: PA2-12 < PA2-11 < PA2-10 < PA2-9 < PA2-8 < PA2-7 < PA2-6 < PA2-5 < PA2-4 <PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each variation pattern in each variation pattern determination table as described above, for the super reach variation pattern, the expected degree of jackpot for the super reach α variation pattern is set to the lowest, the expectation for jackpot for the β variation pattern for super reach is set higher than the expectation for jackpot for the α variation pattern for super reach, the expectation for jackpot for the γ variation pattern for super reach is set higher than the expectation for jackpot for the β variation pattern for super reach, and the expectation for jackpot for the ζ variation pattern for super reach. is set higher than the expected jackpot of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, the expected jackpot of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than the expected jackpot of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the expected jackpot of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the expected jackpot of the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the expected jackpot of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is set higher than the expected jackpot of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern, the expected jackpot of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the expected degree of jackpot of the super reach ι variation pattern, and the expected degree of jackpot of the super reach λ variation pattern is set higher than the expected degree of jackpot of the super reach κ variation pattern. As for the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern, only the variation pattern for the case where the variable display result is wrong as described above is provided, so the degree of expectation for the big hit is zero.

Next, the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle" and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged. In addition, a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories of variable display corresponding to the special figure game (number of special figure reserved memories) is displayed. In the present characteristic part 029SG, it is possible to display these pending displays in a plurality of display modes, and it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice performance (also referred to as pending display notice performance) that changes the ratio (big hit expectation) of being controlled to a big hit game state in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display according to which display mode the pending memory display is displayed.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed as the above-described meter effect, the display mode of which can be changed in five stages (six stages if the meter effect non-execution state is included).

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 029SG is provided with a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIGS. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 029SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 029SG152, a game control timer setting unit 029SG153, and a game control counter setting unit 029SG15. 4, and a game control buffer setting unit 029SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) is generated. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data and the like are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 029SG151A in this manner indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and serves as suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will be achieved based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B stores the reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) which has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) is generated. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data and the like are stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage part 029SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and serves as suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will be achieved based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game.

The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening may be stored in association with the holding number in a common holding storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 029SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 029SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. Based on the passage of the game ball, the random number MR4 for general pattern display result determination is stored as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 029SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may update the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may update the random count value by subjecting all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104 to predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a production control data holding area 029SG190 as shown in, for example, FIGS. The effect control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 029SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 029SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 029SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 029SG194.

The effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11. - 特許庁For example, the effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The production control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 029SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A, a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved storage number of the second special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, four commands, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation memory in the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning are secured with a storage area (entry) for storing separately the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory by associating these start entry winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, and reservation number notification command.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started, and the memory contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved memory where the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the waiting process per special figure executed when the variable display is terminated.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this characterizing part 029SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern associated with the determination of whether or not to execute the prediction notice effect in the prediction notice setting process (Fig. 11-20) is undecided. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage.

In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. By setting "1" (blue circle) or "2" (red circle) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display in a special mode (for example, blue circle or red circle) that is different from the display mode, the suspended memory display of the special mode that is different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first suspended memory display area 029SG5D and the second suspended memory display area 029SG5U. It is foretold that

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A. store it. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reservation number notification command are stored in the storage areas respectively corresponding to the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage.

11-13(B), each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the command stored in the buffer 029SG194A received at the time of starting winning is deleted from the entry (entry of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display that was just finished, and stored in the entry (entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started. , the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reserved memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in the buffer number "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted. , to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characteristic portion 029SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 029SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 029SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the second starting based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not the switch 22B is on (step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (step 029SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 029SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 029SGS103 and step 029SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the count value of the number of the first reserve memory is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 029 SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 (step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, while numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B when the starting opening buffer value is "2".

Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the kind of big hit are used for judging whether or not the result of variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be ``big hit'', and to judge the kind of big hit when the result of variable display is ``big hit''. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step 029 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the memory address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

Following the processing of step 029SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 029 SGS 113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the processing of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 029SGS116), the start winning process is terminated. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 029 SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic part 029SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) is determined as "big hit" by special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 11 to 16) to be described later. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 11 to 17), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning in step 029SGS112, thereby determining whether or not it is determined to stop display the jackpot symbol as a special symbol display result, and determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize winning opening, that is, before it is determined whether or not to be a big hit at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big win" and in which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbols will be, and based on the determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. performs advance notice effects such as pre-reading notice effects as will be described later. will be executed.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by confirming the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152, for example (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies the short working hours state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and specifies the normal state when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 029SGS109 in FIGS. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 029 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each determination value one by one, so that it is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the big hit determination range to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the big hit determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (step 029SGS123; N), that is, if the variable display result is "miss" in the variable display, the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss", is executed (step 029SGS128), and whether the time saving flag is on or not. No, that is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 029SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the change pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set, and when the time saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the change pattern determination table D for loss is selected and set (step 029SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, when it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. At this time, a CPU 103 selects table data for big hit type determination from table data constituting a big hit type determination table according to a variable special figure (a ``first special figure'' corresponding to ``1'' or a ``second special figure'' corresponding to ``2'') specified corresponding to the start buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit A, the third design designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit B, the fourth design designation command in the case of the variable probability big hit C, and the fifth design designation command in the case of the non-variable big hit are executed (step 029SGS133), and the variation pattern determination table for the big hit is selected and set (step 029S). GS135), go to step 029 SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of Step 029SGS130, Step 029SGS131, and Step 029SGS135, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (Step 029SGS138). As shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", a variable category with a variable display mode of "non-reach", a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category with a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and such a variable category is determined based on the random value MR3. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 029SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIGS. 11-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step 029SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 029SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

At step 029SGS141, when the second special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" (step 029SGS141; N), as the reservation data stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved storage number count value and the total reserved storage number count value and updating them, the second special figure reserved storage number and the total reserved storage number are updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated. Specifically, the pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure pending storage unit are shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 029SGS144), it moves to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145). The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting section 029SG154 reads out the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Thus, the processing of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 029SGS141, and it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0". As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which starting prizes are generated, and to determine which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used to start execution of the special symbol game from the stored data.

At step 029SGS145, when the first special figure pending memory number is other than "0" (step 029SGS145; N), numerical data representing random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the count value of the first special figure reserved memory and the count value of the total number of reserved memories and updating them, the first special figure reserved memory number and the total number of reserved memories are updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the data in the first special figure reservation memory is updated. Specifically, the pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 029SGS148), it moves to step 029SGS149.

In step 029 SGS149, the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, is a "jackpot" or a "lose". Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of ``big hit'' or ``losing'' to determine whether the special figure display result is ``big hit'' or ``losing'' (step 029 SGS150a). In this step 029SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability variable state) in which the probability variable flag is on, it is determined as "big hit" if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (variable probability state), and if not, it is determined as "loss". In addition, if the probability variation flag is off and the low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "loss".

Thus, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "big hit" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 029SGS150a, depending on whether the game state is high probability state when the variable display of the special figure game etc. is started, different judgment data (judgment value) is used to set the special figure display result as "big hit". By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a "big hit" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 029SGS150a (step 029SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 turns on the jackpot flag (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 029 SGS153). By referring to the thus set jackpot type determination table, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be according to which of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer and the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of ``non-probability variable jackpot'', ``probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' in the jackpot type determination table matches (step) 029 SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 029 SGS154, it is decided before deriving fixed special symbols as a result of variable display whether the game state after the jackpot game state is finished is controlled to either the time-saving state or the probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is ``non-probability variable big hit'' corresponding to non-probability variable big win, the value of the jackpot type buffer is set to ``0'', if ``probability variable A'' corresponding to probability variable big hit A is ``1'', if ``probability variation B'' corresponding to probability variation big hit B is ``2'', and if ``probability variation C'' corresponding to probability variation big hit C is ``3''.

After the end of step 029SGS155, or when it is determined that it is not a "big win" at step 029SGS150a (step 029SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set according to the result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the big win game state (whether the big win flag is turned on) and the determination result of the big win type in the case of the big win game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the special symbol display result is determined to be "big hit" at step 029SGS150a, when the big hit type at step 029SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 029SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 029SGS158), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, for example, has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration specifying command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIGS. 11-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination at step 029SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit, thereby determining whether the game state is in the time reduction control in which the time reduction control is performed in the variable probability state or the time reduction state (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when it is not in the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, by reading the stored value of the variable special figure pending memory number counter, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special figures is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the variable special figures is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

When the reserved storage number of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step 029SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172).

When the reserved storage number of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and set as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step 029SGS173).

In addition, when the number of pending memories of the identified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and set as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processing of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss By referring to any one of the variation pattern determination tables A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS175).

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 029SGS175. That is, the process of step 029 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 029SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start either the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 029SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands that are used at the start of fluctuation in the special symbol (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially transmits the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first pending storage number notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the command table for the first fluctuation start prepared in advance is set to the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in . On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially transmits the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the second reservation storage number notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is transmitted in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special pattern fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game until the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), is stopped and displayed. After that, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 029SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029 SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The game state designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed, for example, after the variable display result designation command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command or second variable display start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

FIGS. 11-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop and display the stop symbol (step 029 SGS180). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and when the variation special figure specification buffer value is "2" indicating the second special figure, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029 SGS182). When the big hit flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the variable probability flag and the short time flag to turn them off if the variable probability flag and the short time flag are turned on (step 029 SGS184), and the production control board 12 according to the type of the big hit stored. Setting for transmitting a winning start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C) and a winning start 4 designation command (non-probability variable) is performed (step 029 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 029 SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win in the image display device 5) is set in the big win display time timer (step 029 SGS187). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 10 times for non-probability variable big win or probability variable big win A, 5 times for probability variable big win B, 2 times for probability variable big win C) is set in a big winning hole opening frequency counter (step 029 SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029 SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), at step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and when the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 029SGS) 194), after performing the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or the time saving flag (step 029SGS195), proceed to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

11-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). When the big win end display timer is not in operation (step 029SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big win end display time) for performing the big win end display on the image display device 5 is set to the big win end display timer (step 029SGS202), and the processing is finished.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 029 SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and after setting "0" to the time saving number counter (step 029SGS209), the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing steps 029SGS211 and 029SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving number counter is set to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 029SGS214). After setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag turned on (step 029 SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the special pattern normal processing (step 029 SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the start winning by determining whether there is an entry in which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N), the pre-reading advance notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a failure (step 029SGS2). 43). When the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, when the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (step 029SGS243; N), based on the fact that the variable display result is a big win, a table for judging foreknowledge performance at the time of big win (not shown) is referred to determine whether or not to execute the foreknowledge performance and the display pattern in the case of executing the foreknowledge performance (step 029SGS245).

In step 029 SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(A). Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the prefetching advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue circular shape in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) of the prefetching notice effect is decided to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U in a red round shape. .

In step 029 SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be determined at a rate of 5%, execution with the display pattern α of the pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 30%, and execution of the display pattern β of the pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 65%.

Also, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry in which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243; Y), the variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of “non-reach” variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is specified as a category of “super reach” variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified as a category of “other” variation pattern including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, for example, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 029SGS247, by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined (step 029SGS). 248).

In step 029 SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 029SGS247, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (preview type) are varied.

In step 029 SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), for example, when the variable display result is out and the variation category is "non-reach", non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 95%, execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%. When the result of variable display is wrong and the variable category is ``Others'', non-execution of the read-ahead notice performance is determined at a rate of 75%, execution of the read-ahead notice performance display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the read-ahead notice performance display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%. When the result of variable display is a failure and the variable category is ``super ready-to-win'', non-execution of the look-ahead foretelling performance is determined at a rate of 65%, execution of the look-ahead foretelling performance display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%, and execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead foretelling performance is determined at a rate of 10%.

By such setting, when the execution of the read-ahead notice performance is determined, the variable display result has a higher ratio of a big win than when the non-execution of the read-ahead notice performance is decided, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable display which is the object of the read-ahead notice performance. Furthermore, when the read-ahead advance notice performance is executed, the variable display results are more likely to be a big win when the read-ahead notice performance is executed in the display pattern β than in the case of the display pattern α, so that the player can be made to pay attention to which display pattern the reserved storage display targeted for the read-ahead notice performance is displayed.

In this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a big win, the presence or absence of execution of the foreseeing advance notice effect and the display pattern are determined at the same ratio regardless of the type of the big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a big win, the presence or absence of the execution of the foreseeing notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be changed according to the type of the big win. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which jackpot game state is controlled to which jackpot type depending on whether or not the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed and in which display pattern the reserved storage display is displayed.

After executing step 029SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 029SGS247, that is, whether or not the display pattern (preview type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (step 029SGS249).

After execution of step 029SGS245 or when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (prediction type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display in blue circles, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display in red circles, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2". , go to step 029 SGS252.

Also, at step 029SGS249, if execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is not determined (step 029SGS249; N), after setting the suspension display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white round shape (step 029SGS250), the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

In addition, after step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning (step 029SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag.

FIG. 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 029SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is ON (step 029SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0", the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the first special figure pending storage. The flag is shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-2'', and various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-4'' of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-3''.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A, 1 buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 029 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-0", the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the various command data and various types stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the second special figure pending storage. The flag is shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-2'', and various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-4'' of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-3''.

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this characteristic part 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decoration patterns (big hit pattern) in which three patterns are "7" as stop patterns. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big win B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big win C, the stop pattern is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd number patterns other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555" and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable big hit, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (big hit pattern) in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as stop patterns. If the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decoration patterns (lost pattern) in which three patterns are not aligned as the stop pattern is determined. If the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the ready-to-win variation pattern, a combination of the ready-to-win failure (loss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the middle patterns are different is determined as the stop pattern.

In determining these stop patterns, the performance control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop patterns, and determines the stop patterns of the decorative patterns by using a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns and numerical values are associated with each other. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes meter effect determination processing for determining whether or not the meter effect is to be executed and the effect pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super ready-to-win variation pattern (step 029SGS278). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern may be determined by determining whether the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029 SGS275 is the super reach variation pattern.

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y), whether the variation pattern of the variable display is any of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. (Step 029SGS280).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029 SGS281). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029 SGS281; Y), a reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process for determining whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed, and the process proceeds to step 029 SGS283 (step 029 SGS282), where the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ. If there is (step 029SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the reach effect E development notification effect determination process.

In addition, in the processing of step 029SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the variation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, at step 029SGS280, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS280; Y), a branch destination suggestive effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern is executed (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), a reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed. (step 029 SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win to be executed during the variable display from the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-win performance D according to the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 029SGS287), selects the process table corresponding to the determined ready-to-win performance and the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the processing of step 029 SGS287, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11-30(A), if the variation pattern is super reach γ (PB1-4), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach ι (PB1-8), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 11-30(B), if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 90%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach ε (PA2-6), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach ι (PA2-10), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30(A) and 11-30(B), the execution of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D is determined at different ratios depending on the variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss. As a result, the ready-to-win performance D is set higher than the ready-to-win performance C as an overall big win expectation as shown in FIG.

In addition, regardless of the result of the variable display, execution of the ready-to-win performance D is always determined when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win ι (variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach performance H development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance H are executed after the execution of the advance performance and the sign performance). On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach κ (the variation pattern in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance I are executed after the preliminary performance and the sign performance are executed), there are cases where the ready-to-reach performance C is executed and the ready-to-reach performance D is executed.

In other words, with respect to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach ι and variation pattern of super reach κ) in which preliminary effects and precursory effects are executed during variable display in this feature part 029SG, the rate at which the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed in this feature part 029 after execution of the preliminary effect and predictive effect (percentage at which ready-to-win effect I with the highest degree of expectation for big win is executed) is set higher when execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined than when execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined. It is Therefore, in the present characteristic part 029SG, even when the ready-to-win performance C whose degree of expectation for big win is lower than that of the ready-to-win performance D is executed during the variable display, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the pre-performance and foreshadowing performance are executed after the ready-to-win performance C, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the degree of expectation for big win is low when the ready-to-win performance C is executed and reducing the interest in the game during the execution of the ready-to-win performance C.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, when comparing the variation pattern of super reach θ in which the ready-to-reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or ready-to-reach effect D, and the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the advance effect, the sign effect, and the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect are executed instead of these ready-to-reach effect C and ready-to-reach effect D while the reach effect C or ready-to-reach effect D is being executed, the variable display result is large as shown in FIG. 11-30(D). In the case of winning, the difference between the determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance C and the determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-win performance D in the variation pattern of the super reach κ is set to 60%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30(E), when the variable display result is wrong, the difference between the determination ratio of the ready-to-reach effect C and the determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect D in the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of the ready-to-reach effect C and the determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect D in the variation pattern of the super reach κ is set to 20%.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ are determined depending on which of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D is executed. Since it is possible to guess whether it is the variable display of the super ready-to-win θ for which the ready-to-reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the game is played, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the ready-to-win performance C and ready-to-reach performance D will be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

11-22, at step 029SGS289, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a chance-up effect suggesting that the ratio of the variable display results to a big hit (big hit expectation) during variable display and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect (step 029SGS289).

After executing the chance-up effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 next starts a process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect component, the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 213SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 029SGS292). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns into the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In addition, in the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the process timer has timed out. Then, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the content of the next process data. By doing so, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the characteristic portion 029SG.

FIG. 11-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination processing. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS301). If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of non reach, shortened non reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ. (Step 029SGS301; N) determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (Step 029SGS302).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, or super reach λ (step 029 SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern. to determine whether or not to execute the meter effect and the effect pattern (step 029 SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24(A), when the variation pattern is a non-reach (no shortening, non-reach) variation pattern, the non-execution of meter effects is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of meter effects pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of meter effects pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of meter effects pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of meter effects pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%. , execution of the pattern E of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of normal reach, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 20%, execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 50%, execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. Runs in F are determined at a rate of 0%.

If the variation pattern is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ, non-execution of meter effects is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of meter effects pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of meter effects pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, execution of meter effects pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, execution of meter effects pattern D is determined at a rate of 30%, and meter effects are determined at a rate of 30%. Execution in the performance pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution in the meter performance pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the variation pattern is the super reach η variation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 95%, and meter effect pattern F is determined. is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach λ, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and meter effect pattern F is determined. is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-24(B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter effect is a effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the result of the variable display in the case of a non-reduced non-reach variation pattern). The meter 029SG005M is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at a second timing after the first timing (a total of two steps) during the period until the display result notification), and pattern C is the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing during the period from the ready-to-win to the start of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (the period from the ready to to the variable display result in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern). This is an effect pattern that increases by a total of three stages.

Pattern D is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing during execution of the ready-to-win effect A or the ready-to-win effect B (increase by four steps in total). The pattern E is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step (increase by five steps in total) at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (the timing before the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-win performance start/stop notification performance) after the ready-to-win performance A is being executed and at the fifth timing after the fourth timing. Pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the processing of 029SGS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the meter effect is determined (step 029SGS304). When the execution of the meter effect is not determined (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the meter effect is determined (step 029SGS304; Y), the effect pattern of the determined meter effect is stored (step 029SGS305), a meter effect start waiting timer corresponding to the variation pattern is set, and the meter effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS306).

When the execution of the meter performance is determined, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter performance start waiting timer by -1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, when the meter effect start waiting timer times out, the process table for meter effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the meter effect is selected, and the process timer for meter effect is started. Thereafter, the value of the meter effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the meter effect process timer has timed out. When the meter performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the meter performance process timer, and when the meter performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the meter effect can be executed during the variable display.

As described above, in the characteristic part 029SG, by executing the meter effect during the variable display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to 5 levels and whether or not the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development effect is executed by increasing the meter 029SG005M to 5 levels.

FIG. 11-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect determination process. In the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029 SGS311). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach δ, non-execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ, non-execution of the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is determined at a rate of 80%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect has been determined in the process of step 029SGS311 (step 029SGS312). When the execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is not determined (step 029SGS312; N), the ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting effect determination processing is terminated, and when the execution of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting effect is determined (step 029SGS312; Y), a ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect start waiting timer is set and the ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting effect determining process is terminated (step 029SGS313).

When the execution of the ready-to-win performance E development suggestive performance is determined, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the ready-to-win performance E development suggestive performance start waiting timer by 1 each time performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the ready-to-win performance E development suggestive performance start waiting timer value has timed out. At this time, when the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance start waiting timer runs out, the process table for the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is started. After that, the value of the process timer for the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the ready-to-win effect E-development suggestive effect has timed out. When the process timer for ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance does not time out, control of a performance device is executed according to the contents of process data corresponding to the process timer for ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance, and when the process timer for ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the ready-reach effect E development suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the super reach ζ variable display in which the ready-reach effect E advanced notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the super reach δ variable display in which the ready-to-reach effect E advanced notification effect is not executed. It is designed to attract the player's attention and improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 11-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029 SGS321).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach γ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 90%, execution of the branch destination suggestive effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the branch destination suggestive effect pattern Y is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the branch destination suggestive effect pattern Z is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ε, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the branch destination suggestion performance pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the branch destination suggestion performance pattern Y is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the branch destination suggestion performance pattern Z is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach θ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 50%, execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern Y is determined at a rate of 15%, and execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern Z is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ι, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the branch destination suggestion performance pattern X is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the branch destination suggestion performance pattern Y is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of the branch destination suggestion performance pattern Z is determined at a rate of 10%. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach κ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern Y is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern Z is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestive effect is a effect pattern in which the image display device 5 displays the branch destination suggestive image X that suggests both the execution of the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect and the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect during the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D. The pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is a effect pattern to display the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-win effect D on the image display device 5. This is a performance pattern for displaying a branch destination suggesting image Y suggesting execution, and a branch destination suggesting performance pattern Z is a performance pattern for displaying a branch destination suggesting image Z suggesting execution of a high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance during the execution period of a ready-to-win performance C or a ready-to-win performance D in an image display device 5.例文帳に追加

In the characteristic portion 029SG, pattern Z among patterns X to Z is determined to be executed at a rate higher than pattern X or pattern Y when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed. That is, pattern Z is a effect pattern with a higher execution expectation of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect than pattern X or pattern Y (execution expectation of high-expectation reach effect development report effect: pattern Z> pattern Y, pattern Z> pattern X). Pattern Y is determined to be executed at a rate higher than pattern X or pattern X when ready-to-win effect H developmental information effect is executed, that is, pattern Y is a performance pattern with a higher execution expectation of ready-to-win effect H developmental information effect than pattern X or pattern Z (implementation expectation of ready-to-win effect H developmental information effect: pattern Y>pattern Z, pattern Y>pattern X).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern have different determination ratios depending on the variation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ according to the result of the variable display. In other words, the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern are determined according to whether or not the ready-to-reach effect G to the ready-to-reach effect develops after the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D are executed, and to which of the ready-to-reach effect G to the ready-to-reach effect I develops. The determination ratio may be different depending only on the display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the branch destination suggestive effect has been determined in the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). When execution of the branch destination suggestive performance is not determined (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestive performance determination processing is terminated, and when execution of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined (step 029SGS232; Y), the determined performance pattern of the branch destination suggestive performance is stored (step 029SGS323), a timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestive performance is set, and the branch destination suggestive performance determination processing is completed (step 029SGS324).

When execution of the branch destination suggesting performance is decided, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggesting performance start waiting timer by -1 each time performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the branch destination suggesting performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, when a timer for waiting for the start of branch destination suggestion performance times out, a process table for branch destination suggestion performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance is selected, and a branch destination suggestion performance process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for branch destination suggestion effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for branch destination suggestion effect has timed out. When the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is not timed out, control of a performance device is executed according to the contents of process data corresponding to the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance, and when the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is timed out, the process data are switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, any one of the branch destination suggesting image X, the branch destination suggesting image Y, and the branch destination suggesting image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D, thereby making it possible to draw the player's attention to switching to the preliminary performance without notifying the variable display result of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D. Further, depending on which one of the branch destination suggesting image X, the branch destination suggesting image Y, and the branch destination suggesting image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D, since the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect and the ratio of executing the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect after the preliminary effect and the sign effect are different, the player can also determine which of the branch destination suggesting image X, the branch destination suggesting image Y, and the branch destination suggesting image Z is displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to make the player pay attention and improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 11-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect determination process. In the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29(B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ε, non-execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach θ, non-execution of the ready-to-win performance G development suggesting performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the ready-to-win performance G development suggesting performance is determined at a rate of 80%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect has been determined in the process of step 029SGS331 (step 029SGS332). When the execution of the ready-to-win performance G development suggesting performance is not determined (step 029SGS332; N), the ready-to-win performance G development suggestive performance determination processing is terminated, and when the execution of the ready-to-win performance G development suggestive performance is determined (step 029SGS332; Y), a ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggestive performance start waiting timer is set and the ready-to-reach performance G development suggestive performance determination processing is terminated (step 029SGS333).

When execution of the ready-to-win performance G exhibition suggestive performance is determined, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the ready-to-win performance G exhibition suggestive performance start waiting timer by -1 each time performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggestive performance start waiting timer value has timed out. At this time, when the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggesting performance runs out, the process table for the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggesting performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggesting performance is started. After that, the value of the process timer for the ready-to-win effect G exhibition suggestive effect is decremented by -1 every time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the ready-to-win effect G exhibition suggestive effect has timed out. When the process timer for the ready-to-win performance G exhibition suggesting performance is not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for the ready-to-win performance G exhibition suggesting performance, and when the process timer for the ready-to-win performance G exhibition suggesting performance is timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect G information effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect G expansion information effect is not executed. It is designed to attract the player's attention and improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 11-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029 SGS340). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the super-reach variation pattern, it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super-reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029SGS341; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029S). GS342).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS342; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach α or super reach η (step 029 SGS343). If the variable display variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect A and the effect pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS344).

11-32(A) to 11-32(E), the contents of the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-win effect I in the characteristic portion 029SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-32(A) to 11-32(I), each of the ready-to-reach effects A to I is composed of a ready-to-win title display period for displaying the title of each ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 and a battle effect execution period for displaying a battle effect between the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5 after that.

During the ready-to-win title display period of each of the ready-to-win effects A to I, the ready-to-win titles can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 11-33(A)).

Further, regarding the battle effect execution period of the ready-to-reach effect A to the ready-to-reach effect D, a movable body operable period in which the movable body 32 can be operated and a cut-in image displayable period in which a cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 are provided in the first half of the battle effect execution period, and as part of the chance-up effect, it is possible to execute the operation of the movable body 32 during the movable body operable period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period (see FIG. 11-33 (A)).

Regarding the battle effect execution periods of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D, a branch destination suggesting effect executable period is provided after the movable body operable period and the cut-in image displayable period.

In addition, the battle execution period of reach production E and reach directing F has a moving body operation period in the first half of the battle production execution period, and in the latter half of the battle production execution period (near the end of the battle production end timing), the image display device 5 and the push button 31b and the swock controller are held. In order to report the variable display result according to the operation of 31a, there is an operation promotion image display period that displays an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of these push buttons 31b and stick controller 31a to the players. Note that the operation promotion image display period is a period during which the image of the push button 31B is normally displayed.

In this characteristic portion 029SG, during the battle execution period of the ready-to-win effect E and the ready-to-win effect F, as part of the chance-up effect, it is possible to perform the operation of the movable body during the movable body operable period and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation prompting image display period (see FIG. 11-33(B)).

Note that the ready-to-reach effect G, the ready-to-reach effect H, and the ready-to-reach effect I are not provided with a movable body operable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period. That is, the ready-to-win effect G, the ready-to-win effect H, and the ready-to-win effect I are the ready-to-win effects in which the chance-up effect is not executed.

Returning to step 029 SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the chance-up effect at a rate of 60%, determines execution of the chance-up effect pattern P at a rate of 35%, determines execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q at a rate of 5%, and execution of the chance-up effect pattern R at a rate of 0%, as shown in FIG. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect A has been determined (step 029 SGS345). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect A is not determined (step 029 SGS345; N), the process proceeds to step 029 SGS347, and if execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect A is determined (step 029 SGS345; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, a timer for starting the chance-up effect for the reach effect A is set according to the variation pattern, and the process proceeds to step 029 SGS347 (step 029 SGS347). SGS346).

At step 029SGS347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347; Y), whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-reach effect F and the effect pattern are determined according to the result of the variable display (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(B), when the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 40%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern S is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern T is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern U is determined at a rate of 10%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern S is determined at a rate of 20%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern T is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern U is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect F has been determined (step 029 SGS349). When execution of the chance-up performance during execution of the ready-to-win performance F is not determined (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up performance determination processing is terminated, and when execution of the chance-up performance during execution of the ready-to-reach performance F is determined (step 029SGS349; Y), the determined performance pattern is stored, a chance-up performance start timer for the ready-to-reach performance F is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance-up performance determination processing is completed (step 029SGS350). .

Also, in step 029SGS343, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect B and the effect pattern according to the result of the variable display (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), when the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 40%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at a rate of 10%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 20%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect B is determined (step 029 SGS352). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect B is not determined (step 029 SGS352; N), the process proceeds to step 029 SGS354, and if execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect B is determined (step 029 SGS352; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, a chance-up effect start timer for the ready-to-reach effect B is set according to the variation pattern, and the process proceeds to step 029 SGS354 (step 029). SGS353).

At step 029SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029 SGS354; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ (step 029 SGS354; Y), whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect E and the effect pattern are determined according to the result of the variable display (step 029 SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(D), when the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 60%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern S is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern T is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern U is determined at a rate of 0%. When the variable display result is a big hit, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern S is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern T is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern U is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect E has been determined (step 029 SGS356). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect E is not determined (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect E is determined (step 029SGS356; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, a timer for starting the chance-up effect for the ready-to-win effect E is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance-up effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS357). .

Also, in the processing of step 029SGS342, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS342; Y), the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is either of the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach ε (step 029SGS358).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach γ or super reach ε (step 029 SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D according to the result of the variable display. Execution/non-execution and production patterns are determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), when the ready-to-win effect to be executed is the ready-to-win effect C and the variable display result is a loss, non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 60%, execution of the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the chance-up effect pattern R is determined at a rate of 0%. When the variable display result is a big hit, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), when the ready-to-win effect to be executed is the ready-to-win effect D and the variable display result is a loss, non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, execution of the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the chance-up effect pattern R is determined at a rate of 10%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 20%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is determined (step 029 SGS360). If execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is not determined (step 029SGS360; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is determined (step 029SGS360; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is set according to the variation pattern to execute the chance-up effect determination process. End (step 029 SGS361).

When execution of the chance-up performance is decided, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up performance by -1 each time performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up performance has timed out. At this time, when the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up effect times out, the process table for the chance-up effect is selected and the process timer for the chance-up effect is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for chance-up effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for chance-up effect has timed out. When the process timer for chance-up performance is not timed out, control of the performance device is executed according to the contents of process data corresponding to the process timer for chance-up performance, and when the process timer for chance-up performance is timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the chance-up effect can be executed during the variable display.

Especially in this characteristic part 029SG, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether or not the chance-up performance is executed and the number of execution times of the chance-up performance during the execution period of the ready-to-win performance, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of times of execution of the chance-up performance and whether the chance-up performance is executed or not, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in ready-to-win performances with relatively low big win expectation such as ready-to-win performance A to ready-to-win performance D, the chance-up performance is executed at most three times, so that the variable display result can effectively suggest to the player that the variable display result will be a big hit according to the number of execution times of the chance-up performance during the execution of the ready-to-win performance A to ready-to-win performance D.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in ready-to-win performances such as ready-to-win performances G to ready-to-win performances I with high expectations for big wins, chance-up performances that can be executed during the ready-to-win performances are only once.

As shown in FIG. 11-34(E), among the production patterns of the chance-up production in the ready-to-reach production A to D, pattern P is a production pattern in which the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red, but the movement of the movable body 32 and the cut-in image are not displayed. Pattern Q is a production pattern in which the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed, but no cut-in image is displayed. Pattern R is a production pattern in which the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red, the movement of the movable body 32, and the cut-in image are not displayed. This is a production pattern that executes all of the displays.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34(F), among the effect patterns of the chance-up effect in the ready-to-reach effect E and the ready-to-reach effect F, the pattern S is a effect pattern in which the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red but the movement of the movable body 32 and the image of the stick controller 31A are not displayed. 2 and display of the image of the stick controller 31A.

11-34(A) to 11-34(D), as the chance-up performance of the present characteristic part 029SG, the chance-up performance as a whole in the ready-to-win performance A to D is set to the lowest when the chance-up performance is not executed, and when the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern P, the big-hit expectation is set higher than when the chance-up performance is not executed. When the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern Q, the degree of expectation for big win is set higher than in the case where the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern P. - 特許庁When the chance-up performance is executed in pattern R, the degree of expectation for big win is set higher than when the chance-up performance is executed in pattern Q (expectation for big win in chance-up performance in ready-to-win performance A to ready-to-win performance D: pattern R>pattern Q>pattern P>non-execution).

In addition, as a whole of the chance-up performances in the ready-to-win performance E and the ready-to-win performance F, the expectation for the big win is set to be lowest when the chance-up performance is not executed, and the expectation for the big win is set higher when the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern S than when the chance-up performance is not executed. When the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern T, the degree of expectation for the big win is set higher than in the case where the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern S.例文帳に追加Then, when the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern RU, the expectation of the big win is set higher than when the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern T (the expectation of the chance-up performance in the ready-to-win performance E and the ready-to-win performance F: pattern U>pattern T>pattern S>non-execution).

When the ready-to-reach performances A to D are executed and the ready-to-reach performance E or the ready-to-reach performance F is executed, the patterns P and Q are commonly set as executable performance patterns in the ready-to-reach performances A to D, while the pattern R is executable only when the ready-to-reach performance B or the ready-to-reach performance D is executed. In other words, the red display of the ready-to-win title and the movement of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in any of the ready-to-win effects A to D, while the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 is an effect to be executed only in the ready-to-reach effects B and D.

When the ready-to-win performance E is executed and the ready-to-reach performance F is executed, the pattern S and the pattern T are commonly set as executable performance patterns in the ready-to-reach performance E and the ready-to-reach performance F, while the pattern U is executable only when the ready-to-reach performance F is executed. In other words, the red display of the ready-to-win title and the action of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in both the ready-to-win effect E and the ready-to-win effect F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation prompting image is an effect that can be executed only in the ready-to-win effect F.

Next, the effect mode of variable display of Super Reach in this characteristic portion 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, the case where the ready-to-win effect A is executed as the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win will be described. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed in a state where it has not increased by even one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-35(A) to 11-35(D), when the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (this characterizing portion 029SG discloses the case where the pattern D or pattern E is determined to be performed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35(E) and 11-35(F), when the ready-to-win effect A is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the ready-to-win effect A and the expectation degree image 029SG251 indicating the degree of expectation for the big win of the ready-to-win effect A. At this time, when the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, a title image 029SG161A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance A, while when the execution of the chance-up performance is determined in one of the performance patterns of pattern P, pattern Q and pattern R, a title image 029SG161B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance A.例文帳に追加

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect A ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 11-35(G). Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-36(H), even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M is further incremented by one step at the fourth timing.

Further, during the battle performance, when execution of the chance-up performance is determined in the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, as shown in FIG. The movement of the movable body 32 as the chance-up effect is movement from the origin position toward the effect position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the effect position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the pattern R effect pattern, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is lost, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), it is notified that the variable display result is lost when the friend character A is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-reach effect A) is completed, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big win, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), it is reported that the variable display result is a big hit when the friendly character A wins the enemy character A as the result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready effect A) is completed, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big win.

Further, when the variable display is super reach η variable display, as shown in FIGS. 11-37(P) and 11-37(Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image displayable period, the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step (up to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (filled up) and that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37(R), the battle effect is interrupted in the middle, and instead of the battle effect, a high-expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in place of the battle effect. Then, the ready-to-win effect F is started. The details of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

As shown in FIGS. 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when the ready-to-win effect F is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the ready-to-win effect F and the expectation image 029SG256 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect A. At this time, when the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, a title image 029SG166A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance F, while when the execution of the chance-up performance is determined in one of the performance patterns of pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U, a title image 029SG166B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance F.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect F ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B starts as shown in FIG. 11-37(U). During the battle production, when execution of the chance-up production is determined in the production pattern of pattern T or pattern U, as shown in FIGS. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

When the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38(X), 11-38(Y), and 11-38(Z), an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, when the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, and when the execution of the chance-up performance is determined in the performance pattern of the pattern U, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the variable display result is reported as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach η lost variation pattern (PA2-8), as shown in FIGS. 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), it is notified that the variable display result is lost when the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character B as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-reach effect F) ends, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a super ready-to-win η big hit variation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in FIGS. 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), it is reported that the variable display result is a big win when the ally character B wins over the enemy character B as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-to-win effect F) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win.

Next, the case where the ready-to-win effect B is executed as the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win will be described. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed in a state where it has not increased by even one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), when the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (this characterizing section 029SG discloses the case where the execution of pattern D or pattern E is determined), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing after reaching the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40(E) and 11-40(F), when the ready-to-win effect B is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the ready-to-win effect B and the expectation degree image 029SG252 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect B. At this time, when the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, a title image 029SG162A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance B, while when the execution of the chance-up performance is determined in one of the performance patterns of pattern P, pattern Q and pattern R, the title image 029SG162B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance B.例文帳に追加

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect B ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 11-40(G). Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-41(H), even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M is further incremented by one step at the fourth timing.

Further, during the battle effect, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, as shown in FIG. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, as shown in FIGS.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β lost variation pattern (PA2-3), as shown in FIG. 11-41 (L) and FIG. 11-41 (M), it is notified that the variable display result is lost when the friend character B is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-reach effect B) is completed, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super ready-to-win β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), when the friendly character B wins over the enemy character A, the variable display result is reported to be a big hit as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-to-win effect B) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win.

Further, when the variable display is super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42(P) and 11-42(Q), after the cut-in image displayable period ends, friend character B is defeated by enemy character A, and it is once notified that the variable display result is wrong.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect B) is finished, a swinging display is performed with a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative symbols. At this time, when execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is determined, as shown in FIG.

Incidentally, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (S), after the ready-to-win performance E development suggestive performance execution period, the swinging of the ornamental pattern is stopped and the fact that the variable display is off is notified again. On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-42(T), after the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect executable period, the ready-to-reach effect E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed as the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect. Then, the ready-to-win effect E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the ready-to-win effect E is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the ready-to-win effect E and the expectation degree image 029SG255 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect E. At this time, when execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, a title image 029SG165A whose title characters are black is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance E, while when execution of the chance-up performance is determined in one of the performance patterns of pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U, title image 029SG165B whose title characters are red is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect E ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B starts as shown in FIG. 11-42(W). During the battle effect, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined in pattern T or pattern U effect pattern, as shown in FIGS. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

When the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-43(Z), 11-43(a), and 11-43(b), the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A for the player is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation prompting image is displayed. At this time, when the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, and when the execution of the chance-up performance is determined in the performance pattern of the pattern U, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the variable display result is reported as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach ζ lost variation pattern (PA2-7), as shown in FIGS. 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), it is notified that the variable display result is lost when the friend character A is defeated by the enemy character B as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-reach effect E) ends, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a super ready-to-win ζ big hit variation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in FIGS. 11-44(e) and 11-44(f), it is reported that the variable display result is a big win when the friendly character A wins over the enemy character B as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-to-win effect E) is completed, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win.

11-42(Q) to 11-42(T) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45(A) to 11-45(B), when execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is determined, in a state in which decorative patterns are oscillatingly displayed in a combination indicating a failure, as the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect, the first stage display of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting image 029SG170 is performed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. The first-stage ready-to-win effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 may be an image with low visibility from the player, such as having a lower brightness or a smaller display color than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative patterns.

Then, after the display period of the first stage of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 ends, as shown in FIGS. The second-stage ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting image 029SG170 may be an image having higher visibility from the player than the first-stage ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting image 029SG170, such as higher brightness and more display colors than the first-stage ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting image 029SG170.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display according to the variation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification image 029SG181 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach-to-win effect E development notification effect, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG.

Next, the case where the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be described. When the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed as the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the meter effect is not executed, so the explanation of the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win is omitted.

When the ready-to-win effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) to 11-46(C), when the ready-to-win effect C is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the ready-to-win effect C and an expectation degree image 029SG253 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect C. At this time, when the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, a title image 029SG163A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance C, while when the execution of the chance-up performance is determined in one of the performance patterns of pattern P, pattern Q and pattern R, the title image 029SG163B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect C ends, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 11-46(C).

On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(D) to 11-46(F), when the ready-to-win effect D starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the ready-to-win effect D and an expectation image 029SG254 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect D. At this time, when execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, a title image 029SG164A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance D, while when execution of the chance-up performance is determined in one of the performance patterns of pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R, title image 029SG164B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win performance D.例文帳に追加

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect D ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 11-46(F).

Further, during the battle performance of these ready-to-reach performance C or ready-to-reach performance D, if execution of the chance-up performance is determined in the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, as shown in FIGS. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the pattern R effect pattern, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47(K) to 11-47-(M), when the execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined, after the cut-in image displayable period during the battle effect of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, the branch destination suggestive image X suggesting both that the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) and the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development report effect (ready-to-win effect I) will be executed on the image display device 5 as the branch destination suggestive effect. (branch destination suggesting image 029SG005X), branch destination suggesting image Y (branch destination suggesting image 029SG005Y) suggesting execution of ready-to-reach performance H development notification performance (ready-to-reach performance H), branch destination suggesting image Z (branch destination suggesting image 029SG005Z) suggesting execution of high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development reporting performance (ready-reach performance I) are displayed.

After the branch destination suggestion effect executable period, when the variable display is the variable display in the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ lost, as shown in FIGS. It is notified that the variable display is lost by losing to . After the battle effect (ready-to-win effect C or ready-to-win effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in FIGS. 11-48(Q) to 11-48(S), when the ready-to-win effect C is executed, the friendly character C wins over the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and the variable display is notified that the variable display is a big hit. It is notified that the variable display is a big hit. After the battle effect (ready-to-win effect C or ready-to-win effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure.

Further, when the variable display is super reach ε or super reach θ, as shown in FIGS. 11-49(T) to 11-49(V), after the end of the branch destination suggestion effect executable period, friendly character C or friendly character D is defeated by enemy character A, and it is temporarily notified that the variable display result is wrong.

After the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, a swing display is performed in a combination indicating the misalignment of the decorative symbols. At this time, when the execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 11-49(W), as the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect, a ready-to-win effect G development suggestive image 029SG171 is displayed so that the decorative pattern and the display position overlap in the display area of the image display device 5.

Incidentally, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-49(X), after the ready-to-win performance G development suggestive performance execution period, the swinging of the decoration pattern is stopped and the fact that the variable display is off is notified again. On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49(Y), after the reach effect G development suggestive effect executable period, the reach effect G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed as the ready reach effect G development notification effect. Then, the ready-to-win effect G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(Z), when the ready-to-win effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the ready-to-win effect G and the expectation degree image 029SG257 indicating the degree of expectation for the big win of the ready-to-win effect G are displayed on the image display device 5 first.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the ready-to-win effect G ends, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character B starts as shown in FIGS. 11-50(a) and 11-50(b). Incidentally, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach θ deviation variation pattern (PA2-9), as shown in FIGS. 11-50(c) and 11-50(d), it is notified that the variable display result is a failure when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B as a result of the battle presentation, and after the battle presentation (ready-reach presentation G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ big win, as shown in FIGS. 11-50(e) and 11-50(f), it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit when the friend character C wins the enemy character B as the result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready effect G) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big win.

11-49(V) to FIG. 11-49(Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54(A) to 11-54(B), when the execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect is determined, in a state in which decorative patterns are oscillatingly displayed in a combination indicating a failure, as the ready-to-win effect G developing suggesting effect, the first-stage display of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect is performed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. The first-stage ready-to-win effect G development suggesting image 029SG171 may be an image with low visibility from the player, such as having a lower brightness or a smaller display color than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative patterns.

Then, after the display period of the first stage of the ready-to-reach effect G development suggestive image 029SG171 is over, as shown in FIGS. The second-stage ready-to-reach performance G development suggesting image 029SG171 may be an image having higher visibility from the player than the first-stage ready-to-reach performance G development suggesting image 029SG171, such as higher brightness and more display colors than the first-stage ready-to-reach performance G development suggesting image 029SG171.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the ready-to-win effect G developmental notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the ready-to-win effect G developmental notification effect, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG.

In addition, when the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ι or the variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 9SG006 is displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the preliminary performance ends based on the lapse of a predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the central part of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as an indication performance, and the image of the character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the retreat of the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-51(i), the ready-to-win effect H is executed after the ready-to-win effect H-developed notification image 029SG183 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the ready-to-reach effect H advanced notification effect. Further, when the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIG. 11-51(j), the high-expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect, and then the ready-reach effect I is executed. The details of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52(k), when the ready-to-win effect H is started, the image display device 5 first displays a title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H and an expectation image 029SG258 indicating the degree of expectation for the big win of the ready-to-win effect H.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H ends, a battle effect between the friend character D and the enemy character C starts as shown in FIGS. 11-52(l) and 11-52(m). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach ι lost variation pattern (PA2-10), as shown in FIGS. 11-52(n) and 11-52(o), it is notified that the variable display result is lost by the friendly character D being defeated by the enemy character C as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (ready-reach effect H) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach i jackpot variation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in FIGS. 11-52(p) and 11-52(q), it is reported that the variable display result is a big win when the friend character D wins over the enemy character C as a result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53(r) to 11-53(s), when the ready-to-win effect I is started in the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect control, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-win effect I and the expectation image 029SG259 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays both the images of the characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-win performance I and the image of the degree of expectation 029SG259, so that the ready-to-win performance I produces a special feeling due to the higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance of other super-ready-to-win performances.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-win effect I ends, the battle effect of the ally character A to ally character D and the enemy character C starts as shown in FIGS. 11-53(t) and 11-53(u). Incidentally, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach κ loss variation pattern (PA2-11), as shown in FIGS. 11-53(v) and 11-53(w), it is notified that the variable display result is lost by the defeat of the friend character A to the friend character D by the enemy character C as the effect result of the battle effect, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) ends, the decoration pattern is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the loss.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of a super reach κ big hit variation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in FIGS. 11-53(x) and 11-53(y), it is notified that the variable display result is a big win when the friendly characters A to D win against the enemy character C as a result of the battle production, and after the battle production (ready production H) ends, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win.

11-37(R)-FIG. 11-37(T) and FIG. 11-53(r)-FIG. 11-53(s) will now be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is started, the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification image 029SG180 for notifying that the ready-to-reach effect F or the ready-to-win effect I is executed in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. Furthermore, after the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to execute a blackout performance to make the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see.

In the blackout performance, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5 to make it difficult to visually recognize other performance images (variable display images of decorative patterns, images of characters, etc.), the brightness of the display screen itself is lowered, and the volume of the performance sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered compared to before execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance. Furthermore, by lowering the light quantity of the performance light of various light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs, etc.) provided in the game area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the frame 3 for the game machine than before execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance, it is made more difficult to visually recognize other performance images (variable display images of decorative patterns, images of characters, etc.).

After the execution of the blackout effect, the image of the character C is displayed as the preceding effect as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). In the pre-stage production, the contents of the lines spoken by the character C are displayed as a character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55(D) and 11-55(E), the switching effect is executed after the preceding stage effect is completed, and the latter stage effect is executed after the switching effect is completed. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images may be displayed as a switching effect. In addition, when one of a plurality of images can be displayed as a switching effect in this way, the ratio of control to the big win game state may be varied according to which image is displayed.

In the post-stage production, as described above, the lines spoken by the character are displayed as the character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has a smaller number of characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed in the previous stage effect, but the size per character is larger and the brightness is higher than the character image 029SG007 (see FIG. 11-10).

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the latter stage effect is completed, the movable body effect is executed. As the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position above the image display device 5 to the effect position overlapping the front side substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the movable body 32 that has fallen to the performance position is moved to the origin position by being driven by a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable object effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-55(G), a ready-to-win effect corresponding to each variation pattern (ready-to-win effect F if the variable display is the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η, and ready-to-reach effect I if the variable display is the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach κ) is executed.

Next, variable display in the variation pattern of super reach λ will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach λ, first, when the variable display is started, the meter 029SG005M at the second timing before the reach increases at once to the 5th stage and fills up. Next, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed in the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (filled up) and that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be executed.

Then, the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed without any of the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-win effect D being executed. Incidentally, the effect mode of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is the same as the effect mode described above with reference to FIG. 11-55. After the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect, as shown in FIG. 11-53, the ready-to-win effect I is executed, and finally the variable display result is a loss or a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is set longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect, and the ready-to-win effect E is executed after the start of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect, and the variable display result as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect E is reported to be a big hit. The length of the period until L11 is set to be shorter than the length of the period L12 from when the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is started to when the ready-to-win effect F is executed and a variable display result is notified as a result of the ready-to-win effect F to be a big win, and the period length L13 from when the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is started to when the ready-to-win effect development I is executed and a variable display result is notified as a effect result of the ready-to-win effect I to be a big win. When the ready-to-win performance E is executed after execution of the hit performance E development suggestive performance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the excessive extension of the period until the variable display result is notified of the big win. In addition, when the ready-to-win performance I is executed after the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance, the player can be favorably focused on the ready-to-win performance I before the variable display result is reported to be a big hit, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the ready-to-win performance B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value performance A, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the ready-to-win performance B over a longer period of time than the ready-to-win performance A, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, unlike the ready-to-win effect A, the ready-to-win effect B does not execute the extended notification effect before the variable display result is notified as the effect result. Therefore, even when the ready-to-win effect E extended notification effect is not executed, it is possible to surely make the player pay attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B to the big win.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, during the execution of the ready-to-reach performance A and the ready-to-reach performance B, there are cases where the meter performance is executed as a performance suggesting the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance, so that the execution of the meter performance can arouse the player's expectation for the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the meter effect, the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, or the like.

Further, in the characterizing part 029SG, a mode in which the meter performance can be executed only when the ready-to-win performance A or the ready-to-reach performance B is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance may be executed even when the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D is executed. In particular, in the variable display of the super ready-to-reach κ variation pattern in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance I are executed after the preliminary performance and the predictive performance are executed from the middle of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D, there may be provided a case where the meter 029SG005M increases up to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode for notifying the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development reporting performance) triggered by the preliminary performance and the predictive performance. In this way, the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ can attract the player's attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth level during the execution of the advance performance or the portent performance, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth step at the second timing without going through the execution of the ready-to-win effect A, and the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed. You can improve your interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, in this characteristic part 029SG, when the ready-to-win production B is executed, the high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification production and the ready-to-win production I are not executed. By doing so, even when the ready-to-win performance B is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance I are executed or not, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the meter 029SG005M is exemplified as a mode in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at each of the first timing to the fifth timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case in which the meter 029SG005M increases by two steps or more at any timing may be provided. Furthermore, when the meter 029SG005M increases by two steps or more in any of the first timing to the fifth timing in this manner, the rate at which the ready-to-win effect I develops differs between when the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth step before the start of the ready-to-win effect A and the ready-to-win effect B and when the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth step after the start of the ready-to-win effect A and the ready-to-win effect B. may In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages as an example of the meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the meter 029SG005M may be changed in four stages or less or six stages or more as the meter effect.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is started to when the ready-to-win effect I is executed and the variable display result is reported to be a big hit as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect I is longer than the length L12 of the period from when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is started to when the ready-to-win effect development F is executed and the variable display result is reported to be a big hit as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect F. Since the game machine is set long, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state by lengthening the period until the result of the performance when the ready-to-win performance I with a higher degree of expectation for the big win is executed is notified.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect in the feature part 029SG is a effect in which the display mode changes step by step over a maximum of 5 stages from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display (6 stages if the meter effect non-execution state is included). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the ready-to-win effect E in the characteristic portion 029SG is an effect in which the display mode of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 changes in two stages. That is, in this characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 levels as the meter effect, but as the reach effect E development suggestive effect, the display mode of the ready reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 can be changed only up to 2 levels. Therefore, in the meter performance, the image (the meter 029SG005M) to be played is more likely to change up to the fifth stage than in the ready-to-win performance E development suggestive performance, so that the player can be made to pay attention to whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five levels as the meter effect, while the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed only up to the second level as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. good too. When the display mode of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 can be changed up to the fifth level as the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect in this way, the rate at which the display mode of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 changes up to the fifth level should be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth level.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display of super reach δ and super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set to be longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect execution possible period L6a, so execution of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect is suggested that the ready-to-win effect F with a higher expectation for big win than the ready-to-win effect A is executed after the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed. Since the ready-to-win effect E can be suggested over a long period of time rather than being executed later, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this characteristic part 029SG, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect executable period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect executable period.

Further, in the characteristic portion 029SG, the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when execution of the meter effect is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when execution of the meter effect is determined. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the first step increase timing.

Furthermore, since the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is a performance that can be executed after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance B, the performance to execute the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is executed during the execution of the ready-to-win performance B, thereby preventing the decrease in game interest due to the player recognizing that the variable display result as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance B is not reported to be a big win.

In this characteristic portion 029SG, as the pattern for developing from the ready-to-reach effect B to the ready-to-reach effect E, only the pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is announced as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect B (see FIG. 1-8 (F)) is disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the pattern to develop from the ready-to-reach effect B to the ready-to-win effect E, the variable display result is reported as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect B. A case may be provided in which the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect E are executed before being executed. Thus, when the ready-to-win performance E development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance B, the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance may be executed during the execution of the ready-to-win performance B.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 to 11-34, the chance-up performance can be executed during execution of the ready-to-win performance A to F, and the degree of expectation for big win differs depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

In particular, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win effect η in which the ready-to-reach effect F is executed after the ready-to-reach effect A, during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect A, the effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed for a total of two times, the red display of the ready-to-reach title and the movement of the movable body 32. During the execution of the ready-to-reach effect F, the red display of the ready-to-reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the image display of the stick controller 31A as an operation promoting image constitute the chance-up effect for a total of three times. It is possible to perform the production. As a result, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach η, the number of executions of the performances constituting the chance-up performance increases during the execution of the ready-to-win performance F rather than during the execution of the ready-to-win performance A, so that the player can be favorably focused on the performance result of the ready-to-win performance F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super ready-to-win ζ in which the ready-to-reach effect E is executed after the ready-to-reach effect B is executed, during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect B, the effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed for a total of three times, i.e., the red display of the ready-to-reach effect, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200. It is possible to execute an effect that constitutes a chance-up effect over a period of time. As a result, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach ζ, the number of executions of the performances constituting the chance-up performance is less during the execution of the ready-to-win performance E than during the execution of the ready-to-win performance B, so that it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the performance result of the ready-to-win performance E, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In this feature part 029SG, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ in which the ready-to-reach effect E is executed after the ready-to-reach effect B is executed, during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect B, it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect for a total of three times by displaying the ready-to-reach title in red, moving the movable body 32, and displaying the cut-in image 029SG200. A mode is exemplified in which the performance constituting the chance-up performance can be executed for a total of two times with 32 operations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and regarding the variable display of the variable display of the super ready-to-win ζ in which the ready-to-win performance E is executed after the ready-to-win performance B is executed, the same number of performances constituting the chance-up performance can be executed during the execution of the ready-to-win performance B as during the execution of the ready-to-win performance E.

In this characterizing portion 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified. The display of the (pseudo light guide plate), the operation of the image display device 5 itself, and the like may be included in the effects constituting the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the ready-to-win title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image, etc. are all illustrated as effects (active effects) executed regardless of the player's operation. It may include an effect (active effect) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating the operation means such as A (so-called back button).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-30, regarding the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι and super reach κ, it is possible to determine the reach performance of super reach to be executed from the reach performance C and the reach performance D having a higher expectation of big hit than the reach performance C. Then, when the advance performance and the sign performance are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D, and when the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance I is executed, and when the ready-to-win performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D, the ready-to-win performance G with a lower expectation for big win than the ready-to-win performance I is executed. .

Further, the advance performance and the sign performance are executed before the variable display result is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D, and when the ready-to-win performance H developmental notification performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance H having a lower expectation for big win than the ready-to-win performance I is executed, so that the performance can be diversified by combining the types of the ready-to-win performance and the developmental information performance.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, by determining which of the ready-to-reach production C and the ready-to-reach production D is to be executed at the ratio shown in FIGS. Since the rate of execution of the ready-to-win performance development notification performance) is set high, the ready-to-win performance to be executed and the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance can be given a predetermined relationship, and the performance interest of the ready-to-reach performance and the development notification performance can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 029SG, in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the form in which the ready-to-reach effect to be executed can be determined from the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change pattern to execute the ready-to-reach effect C during variable display and the change pattern to execute the ready-to-reach effect D during variable display may be separately provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the characterizing section 029SG determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern at different ratios according to the variable display result. (development to one of ready-to-win effect E to ready-to-win effect I).

Further, as the chance-up performance, in addition to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit and one of the ready-to-win performances E to I is executed, it may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds of the big-hit game when the variable display result is a big win is 10 rounds, that the game is controlled to a variable probability state after the big-hit game is finished, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-9, when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed after the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is executed, and when the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is executed, a common preliminary effect can be executed in the period between the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D and the development notification effect. At the same time, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance H development notification performance is executed as the development notification performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and FIGS. 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, after the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, it is suggested which of the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect and the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be executed, and a branch destination suggestion that can suggest both the execution of the ready-to-reach effect H development effect and the execution of the high-expectation reach effect development effect. Since the performance can be executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the ready-to-win performance H development reporting performance and the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development reporting performance will be executed while increasing the player's attention to the execution of the development reporting performance by executing the development destination suggesting performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a configuration is exemplified in which it is possible to suggest execution of the ready-to-win effect H developmental information effect and execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect developmental information effect as the developmental destination suggesting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest execution of the ready-to-win effect G developmental information effect as the developmental destination suggestive effect.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 029SG, a form in which the development destination suggesting performance can be executed by the variable display of the ready-to-win performance C or the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance C is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the development destination suggesting performance may also be executed in the variable display of the variation pattern to execute the ready-to-win performance A or the variable display of the variation pattern to execute the ready-to-win performance B.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-30(D), with regard to the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, and the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the ready-to-reach effect G developmental notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect G are performed after the effect result is notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, super reach κ. The difference between the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern is 60%, whereas the difference between the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect C is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect D is executed is 40%. Since it becomes possible to guess whether the variation pattern is variable display, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D will be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this characteristic part 029SG, when the variable display results in the variation pattern of super reach κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ result in a big hit, the difference between the ratio of executing ready-to-reach effect C and the ratio of executing ready-to-win effect D in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ is set to be smaller than the difference between the ratio of executing ready-to-reach effect C and the ratio of executing ready-to-win effect D in variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. However, when the variable display result is wrong, the difference between the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect C and the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect D in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ may be set smaller than the difference between the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect C and the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect D in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 029SG, the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U that can display the reserved memory display at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. center) may be provided with an active display area 029SG005F capable of displaying a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

Further, when the active display can be displayed in this way, a plurality of display modes of the active display may be provided in the same manner as the above-described look-ahead notice performance, and depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, the active display performance with different degrees of expectation for big wins may be executed. For example, three types of active display modes, ie, a white round shape, a blue round shape, and a red round shape, may be provided, and the expectation of a big win is set to be the highest when the active display mode is a red circle, and the lowest when the active display mode is displayed (the expectation of a big win in the active display mode: red>blue>white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during the variable display, and the change of the display mode of the active display to the red round shape can suggest that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable display during execution has increased.

When the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-58(A) and 11-58(B), with respect to the variable display of the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win ζ in which the ready-to-reach effect E is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect B, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect E is set to P1.

Further, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super ready-to-win η in which the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed during execution of the ready-to-win performance A and then the ready-to-win performance F is further executed, P2 is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during the execution of the ready-to-win performance A, and P3 is the rate at which the active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during the execution of the ready-to-win performance F.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during execution of the ready-to-win effect F, may be set higher than P1, which is the rate at which the display mode of active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during execution of the ready-to-win effect E, or P2, which is the rate at which the display mode of active display changes from white round or blue round to red round during execution of the ready-to-win effect A.

By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η (when the ready-to-win performance A is executed and the ready-to-win performance F is executed), the possibility that the ready-to-reach performance F will be executed can be reduced by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circular shape before the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is started. In addition, when the ready-to-win performance E is executed and when the ready-to-win performance F is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to a red circular shape at a higher rate in the ready-to-win performance F with a higher expectation for the big win than the ready-to-win performance E, so that the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red circular shape according to the degree of expectation for the big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach η, the ratio P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect F is higher than the ratio P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 029SG-. As 2, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η as in the above modification 029SG-1, the ratio P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect F is set higher than the ratio P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A. A rate P1 at which the display mode of the display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape may be set higher than a rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during execution of the ready-to-win performance B.

In this way, a plurality of active display modes are provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation for a big win, and the display mode of the active display changes to a red round shape before execution of the ready-to-win performance E development notification performance or the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance, thereby reducing the risk of lowering the interest in the game due to the player preliminarily recognizing that the expectation for the big win is high. I can.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, a variation pattern of super reach λ is provided in which a high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed without going through a ready-to-reach effect such as a ready-to-reach effect A or a ready-to-reach effect B, and a ready-to-reach effect I is executed. P5 may be set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the ready-to-win effect I. Thus, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape before the execution of the ready-to-win performance I, the player can easily recognize that the ready-to-win performance I will be executed in advance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the ratio P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the ready-to-win effect I is set higher than the ratio P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-win effect I. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach λ is not limited to this. In the variable display of the variation pattern, a rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape before the start of the ready-to-win performance I may be set lower than a rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the ready-to-win performance I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the ready-to-win performance I is executed without going through other ready-to-win performances even though the display mode of the active display is not changed to a red round shape, so that the game can be given unexpectedness and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, three types of display modes of the reserved memory display and the active display, namely, a white round shape, a blue round shape, and a red circular shape, are provided, and the degree of expectation for the big hit is changed according to which display mode the reserved memory display and the active display are displayed. or four or more types.

Furthermore, in Modification 029SG-1 to Modification 029SG-3, the form in which the display mode of the active display can be changed during execution of the ready-to-win effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change timing of the active display mode may include timing other than during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, for example, during the execution of the development suggestive effect or the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, and the like. Further, when a pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols can be executed during variable display, the display mode of active display may be changed at the timing of temporary stop and re-variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, three types of display modes of the pending memory display, ie, a white round shape, a blue round shape, and a red round shape, are provided, and an example is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is changed according to which display mode the pending memory display is displayed. It may be possible to suggest which of the ready-to-win effects E, ready-to-win effects F, ready-to-win effects G, ready-to-win effects H, and ready-to-win effects I will be developed according to the situation. In this case, when the CPU 103 determines that the variation pattern (variation category) is super ready-to-win by executing the random number value determination process at the time of winning, it further determines which of the super-reach variation patterns from among super-reach α to super-reach λ (Which of the ready-to-reach performance A to ready-to-reach performance I is to be executed during variable display), and transmits to the performance control board 12 a super-ready-to-win variation category command (variation category command including information on which super-reach variation pattern to be performed) according to the determination. Good. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the display mode of the pending memory table display from circle, triangle, square, star, etc., based on the variable category command of super reach received from the CPU 103. In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved memory display before the start of the variable display, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form that can suggest a ready-to-win production that develops by the shape of the reserved memory display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the color of the reserved memory display suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the shape of the reserved memory display may further suggest the ready-to-win production of the development destination. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and the shape of the display of the reserved memory, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-4, a form in which the shape of the reserved memory display can suggest the ready-to-win production of the development destination is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-win production that can suggest the development destination by the shape of the reserved memory display may be only a part of the ready-to-win production E, ready-to-win production F, ready-to-win production G, ready-to-win production H, and ready-to-win production I (for example, only ready-to-win production E and ready-to-win production I).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, as the chance-up effect, the characters of the ready-to-win title image can be displayed in red at the start of the ready-to-win effect A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification example 029SG-5, as the chance-up effect, the characters of the ready-to-win title image displayed in black may be changed to red from the middle. In particular, when the character of the ready-to-win title image is changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, the display mode of the expectation degree image indicating the degree of expectation for big win displayed together with the ready-to-win title image may be changed (for example, the number of stars displayed as the expectation degree image may be increased). By doing so, the display mode of the expectation degree image changes with the change of the character color of the ready-to-win title image from black to red, so that the attention to the expectation degree image can be increased, so that the player can accurately recognize the degree of expectation of the ready-to-win performance to be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, in the characteristic portion 029SG, regarding the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, a form is exemplified in which the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestive effect can be determined at the same rate when the super reach effect to be executed is the reach effect C and when the super reach effect is the ready reach effect D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach κ Whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestive performance and the pattern of the branch destination suggestive performance may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the ready-to-win ready-to-win performance is the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-win performance D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as a modified example 029SG-6, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, when the ready-to-win effect to be executed is determined to be the ready-to-reach effect C, non-execution of the branch destination suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 15%, and the branch destination suggesting effect pattern X is used. execution is determined at a rate of 30%, execution with the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution with the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 35%. In the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, when the ready-to-reach performance to be executed is determined to be the ready-to-win performance D, non-execution of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern Y is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the branch destination suggestive performance pattern Z is determined at a rate of 40%.

In particular, in this modification 029SG-6, when execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestive effect is set higher than when execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the super reach κ variation pattern (the decision ratio of non-execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is set to be lower). It is possible to favorably suggest that the development notification effect is to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In this modification 029SG-6, when execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggesting effect is set higher than when execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. The execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggesting effect may be set lower than in the case where the execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined in the variable display of the pattern.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution decision ratio of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive effect (the effect pattern suggesting the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect) is set higher than when the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the super reach κ variation pattern. It is possible to more preferably suggest that the development notification effect such as the development notification effect such as the Chi effect development notification effect will be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

In modification 029SG-6, when execution of ready-to-reach effect C is determined in variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, execution of ready-to-reach effect C is determined in variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. The execution determination ratio of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive effect may be set lower than the case where the execution of the ready-reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach κ.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in this variation 029SG-6, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestive effect at different rates depending on whether the super reach effect to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the super reach θ and super reach ι variation patterns is also exemplified. Execution/non-execution of the branch destination suggesting performance and the performance pattern of the branch destination suggesting performance may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-win performance D.例文帳に追加

Further, in this modification 029SG-6, a branch destination suggesting effect executable during execution of the ready-to-win effect C (the first advantageous result suggesting effect in the invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggesting effect executable during the execution of the ready-to-win effect D (the second advantageous result suggesting effect in the invention 033SG) are exemplified as effects of the same effect mode. The possible branch destination suggesting effect may be executable as a different effect mode effect.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, in the characteristic portion 029SG, reach effects A to D are executed as the ready-to-reach effects of super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any one of the reach effects E to I. A notification mode (first notification mode) is exemplified in which any one of the reach effects A to D is simply executed and the variable display result is notified, but the present invention is exemplified. As modification 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as ready-to-reach effects of super reach, and variable display results are reported without progressing to any of reach effects E to I. In addition to the first notification mode, in addition to the first notification mode, it is reported that the variable display results are lost as the effect results of the ready-to-reach effects A to D, and then the variable display result is reported to be a big hit again. Two notification modes (so-called recovery mode) may be provided.

When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the ready-to-reach performances A to D are executed as the ready-to-reach performances of the super reach and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the ready-to-reach performances E to I, the ratio of execution of the branch destination suggesting performance in the pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of the ready-to-reach performances C and D are notified in the first notification mode and the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D. may be the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggesting effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of is notified in the second notification mode.

Thus, the ready-to-win performance A to D are executed as the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, and the second reporting mode is provided as a reporting mode in which the variable display result is reported without progressing to any of the ready-to-reach performance E to I, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise by being notified again that the variable display result is a big win even though the variable display result is once reported to be lost. Furthermore, since the processing for determining the execution of the branch destination suggesting performance can be made common between when the performance result (variable display result) when executing the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D is notified in the first reporting mode and in the second reporting mode, the amount of data required for the processing can be suppressed.

In this modification 029SG-7, when the ready-to-reach effects A to D are executed as the ready-to-reach effects of the super reach effect, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the ready-to-reach effects E to I, when the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is notified in the first notification mode. A mode is exemplified in which the proportion of execution of the branch destination suggestive effect in the pattern Z is the same when the effect result (variable display result) of the hit effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-reach effect D are executed as the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win effect, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any one of the ready-to-reach effect E to the ready-to-reach effect I, and the first notification mode and the second notification mode are used. is provided, the rate at which the branch destination suggesting performance is executed in the pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be different from the ratio in which the branch destination suggestive performance is executed in the pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D is notified in the second reporting mode.

In the modification 029SG-7, as the ready-to-reach effect A to D are executed as the ready-to-reach effect, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the ready-to-reach effect E to I, the first notification mode in which any one of the ready-to-reach effects A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the change in the variable display result is temporarily notified as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect A to D. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 029SG-8, the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed, and after it is notified that the variable display result is lost as the effect result of these ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the ready-to-win effect G advanced notification effect and the ready-to-win effect G are executed, and the ready-to-win effect G is executed as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect G. When it is reported that the variable display result is a big win (when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot), the rate at which the chance-up performance is performed during the variable display in the variation pattern for the super reach θ jackpot may be different from the rate at which the chance-up performance is performed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode. In this manner, when the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-win performance D is executed, the execution ratio of the chance-up performance can be changed depending on whether or not the ready-to-win performance G is executed until the variable display result is notified that the big hit is announced, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification, the ratio of executing the chance-up effect during the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot differs from the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the variable display in which the effect result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode. The effect result (variable display result) may be the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, the branch destination suggesting performance can be executed in a plurality of performance patterns, and depending on which performance pattern the branch destination suggesting performance is executed, the execution ratio of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is exemplified. In particular, in the characteristic part 029SG, the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed at the highest rate when the branch destination suggestive effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the branch destination suggestive effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99%).

Particularly, when the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed at an extremely high rate when the branch destination suggestive performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, a case where the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development report performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestive performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, or a case in which the ready-to-win performance I is executed even though the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development report performance is not executed (a so-called performance conflict pattern) may be provided. In the case where such a pattern of performance contradiction is provided, the branch destination suggesting performance and the ready-to-win performance I in the performance pattern Z are executed only when the variable display result is reported to be a big win, thereby making it possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and to make the player pay attention to whether or not the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed when the branch destination suggesting performance is executed in the pattern Z or when the ready-to-win performance I is executed. can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (loss) is reported as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect G are further executed, the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D are different. As 029SG-10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D may be the same. By doing so, in both cases of executing the ready-to-win performance C and to executing the ready-to-win performance D, the players can expect that the ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this modification 029SG-10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect D are exemplified as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to produce an effect that a player can expect from the execution of the performance, the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance C and the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance C and the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance C and the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win performance D are substantially the same).

Further, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the variable display in the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win θ in which the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect G are further executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the big win expectation when execution of the ready-to-win performance C is determined and the big-hit expectation when execution of the ready-to-win performance D is determined may be the same. In this way, in both the case where the ready-to-win performance C is executed and the ready-to-win performance is executed, when the ready-to-win performance G development notification performance is executed, the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a big hit as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance G, so that the game amusement can be improved.

In this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the expected level of the big hit when the execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined and the expected level of the big win when the execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to produce an effect that a player can expect to be informed that the variable display result will be a big win as the performance result of G, the big win expectation degree of the ready-to-win performance C and the big-hit expectation degree of the ready-to-win performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the big win expectation degree of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the big win expectation degree of the ready-to-win performance C and the big win expectation degree of the ready-to-win performance D are substantially the same).

11-34, the characterizing portion 029SG can execute the ready-to-win title red display, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image as effects constituting the chance-up effect. In the ready-to-win effect E and the ready-to-win effect F executed before the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect, the red display of the ready-to-win title and the movement of the movable body 32 are executed as a common effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can be different. In this way, while suppressing an increase in the number of performances executable as the chance-up performance (the number of performance patterns of the chance-up performance), the player can be made to pay attention to which ready-to-win performance the red display of the ready-to-win title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performed during the execution of the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, in the characterizing part 029SG, the presence or absence of execution of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect can be determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss. .

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13, regarding the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect I are executed before the variable display result (miss) is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at a different rate depending on whether the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is determined. Good. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, when execution of ready-to-win performance D is determined, execution of chance-up performance is determined at a higher rate than when execution of ready-to-win performance C is determined.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) is provided in which it is once notified that the variable display result is a hit as the performance results of the ready-to-win effects A to D, and then the variable display result is once again notified to be a big hit. As the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. A resurrection performance may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big win between the time when the variable display is stopped.

In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed after the variable display result of the ready-to-reach effect A to the ready-to-reach effect D is temporarily notified that the result is a loss (when the variable display is executed in any of the variation patterns of super ready-to-win α, super ready-to-win β, and super ready-to-win γ to achieve a big hit), as shown in FIGS. The length of the period L22 from the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect to the end timing of the ready-to-reach effect E (variable display result notification timing) when the ready-to-reach effect E development suggest effect, the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect, and the ready-to-reach effect E are executed after being notified that the failure is notified, and the ready-to-reach effect G after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D. When development suggestive performance, ready-to-win performance G development notification performance, and ready-to-win performance G are executed (when variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach θ), the length of the period from the start timing of development suggestive performance G to the end timing of ready-to-reach performance G (variable display result notification timing) may be set shorter than L23 to prevent the decrease in game interest due to redundant performance (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), the length L21 of the performance period of the resurrection effect is set shorter than the length L32 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect to the end timing of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect, and the length L33 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the ready-to-reach effect G development notification effect. It is possible to give unexpectedness to

In addition, in the present modification 029SG-14, the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result is lost as the effect results of the ready-to-reach effects A to D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect and ready-to-win effect F are executed during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A (when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η and a big win is achieved), the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-reach effect are performed. During the execution of D, a preliminary performance, a sign performance, a ready-to-win performance H development notification performance, and a ready-to-reach performance H are executed (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι, resulting in a big hit). Good.

In addition, as shown in the characteristic portion 029SG, the ratio of a big hit by execution of the ready-to-reach production A to the ready-to-reach production D (expectation of a big hit) is set lower than the ratio of a big win to the production of the ready-to-win production F, the ready-to-reach production G, and the ready-to-win production I (expectation of a big win). By setting the ratio of execution of the resurrection performance to be higher than the ratio of the execution of the ready-to-win performance F, the ready-to-reach performance G, and the ready-to-win performance I to achieve a big hit, the players may be made to pay attention to the execution of the resurrection performance even when the ready-to-reach performance A to the ready-to-reach performance D are executed and the result of the variable display is reported to be a loss.

In addition, after the ready-to-reach effect B is once notified that the variable display result is a failure as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect B, the ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting effect, the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect, and the ready-to-win effect E are executed and a big win is achieved (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ζ and the hit is achieved), or after it is once notified that the variable display result is a loss as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, the reach effect G development suggesting effect, the reach effect A case may be provided in which the revival performance is executed even when the hit performance G development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance G are executed to result in a big hit (when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach θ and the big hit is achieved), but in the case where the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach ζ and the super reach θ, it is notified that the variable display result is lost once before the revival performance, so that the failure of the variable display result is notified twice or more as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance, thereby making the performance redundant. In order to suppress the risk of lowering the interest in the game due to such a situation, when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern of super reach ζ and super reach θ and the big win is achieved, the resurrection performance may not be executed, or the resurrection performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η and super reach ι super reach κ and the big hit is achieved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a form in which control to the time saving state is possible after the end of the big hit game is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of execution times of the variable display is a specific number (for example, 900 times).

In particular, in this way, in the case of controlling to the time saving state in response to the number of execution times of the variable display reaching a specific number of times, or in the case of controlling to the time saving state in response to the derivation display of a part of the deviation, the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect shown in the characteristic part 029SG, or the effect to notify that it will be controlled to the time saving state after executing the resurrection effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 may be executed. By doing so, in the case of controlling to the time-saving state in response to the number of execution times of the variable display reaching a specific number of times, or in the case of controlling to the time-saving state in response to the derivation display of a part of the deviation, whether the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance or the resurrection performance is executed to control to the time-saving state, whether the variable display result is notified of a big hit, or whether the high-expected ready-to-reach performance such as the ready-to-win performance I is executed. You can improve your taste.

Further, as the characteristic portion 029SG, the embodiment in which both the inventions 029SG and 033SG are implemented has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and either one of the inventions 029SG and 033SG may be implemented.

Further, in the characterizing section 029SG, the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to slot machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect I) and a first suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect A), a second suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect B), a third suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect), and a fourth suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect E) (e.g., effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in ),
A special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, in the variable display of the super reach η variation pattern as shown in FIG. 11-8, the high-expectation ready-reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect A), and after it is notified that the advantageous state is not controlled as the effect result of the second suggestion effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as the second development pattern ( For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the effect result of ready reach effect B, the ready reach effect E development notification effect is executed) and the development effect execution means (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion performance with the higher expectation than the first suggestion performance after the execution of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed from the time the ready-to-reach performance A is being executed, and the ready-to-reach performance F is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the fourth suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance B, and then the ready-to-reach performance E is executed).
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the execution period length L7 of the high-expectation ready-to-win production development notification production is longer than the execution period length L6b of the ready-to-reach production E development notification production),
The special development effect includes a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered (for example, the blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), a secondary effect which is executed after the primary effect and in which the preceding stage information is visibly displayed (for example, the preceding stage effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and an effect which is executed after the secondary effect and in which the post-stage information with a higher degree of emphasis than the preceding stage information is visibly displayed. including a tertiary production (for example, the latter production shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55),
The period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification of the control to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect I (notification timing of the variable display result), and the reach from the start timing of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect. The length L12 of the period until the end timing of the effect F is set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect E (notification timing of the variable display result)),
The effect period of the second suggested effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of ready-to-win effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of ready-to-win effect A),
moreover,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
The cover portion is provided with predetermined restricting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) for restricting the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion (see FIGS. 31 and 33),
A game machine in which a plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion is provided in the guiding passage forming portion (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 36).
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestive performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to excessively long period until the control to the advantageous state is notified, and when the special suggestive performance is executed after the special development performance is executed, the player can be favorably focused on the special suggestive performance before the control to the advantageous state is reported, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the period until it is notified that it is controlled to an advantageous state from being excessively prolonged, and the length of the performance period and the period from the execution of the developed performance to the notification that it is controlled to the advantageous state are changed depending on the type of the developed performance, and the development performance and the notification that it is controlled to the advantageous state are executed in an appropriate length of the performance period according to the type of the developed performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that is more interesting and less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of design freedom without impairing the appearance of the gaming machine with electronic components, a gaming machine that can play (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
The cover portion is provided with predetermined restricting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) for restricting the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion (see FIGS. 31 and 33),
A game machine in which a plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion is provided in the guiding passage forming portion (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 36). The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Other form examples)
A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover part (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part,
The cover portion is provided with predetermined restricting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) for restricting screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) falling on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) (see FIGS. 31 and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A-316C, grooves 326A-326C, recess 336) are characterized in that they are provided so that the game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there.
According to this feature, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can always be kept in a staying state, the screw member dropped onto the cover portion can be prevented from dropping into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restriction portion includes a first retention portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retention portion (e.g., grooves 326A to 326C) that allow the screw members (e.g., screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion,
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A plurality of specific restricting portions (eg, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device 200) are provided (see FIGS. 21 and 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage-forming portion to drop outside the guide passage-forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion (L11>L2, see FIG. 20).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed in the delivery portion. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined hole that is the largest among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G; see FIG. 21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped inside the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
An uncovered area (e.g., an uncovered area 350) not covered by the cover (e.g., the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) is provided on the upper surface of the guide passage-forming part (e.g., the first guide path-forming part 202),
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 28(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The number of wires connected to the first substrate is smaller than that of the external output substrate (for example, the number of cables C connectable to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path formation portion 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). A second number (for example, 10), which is less than the number, is used.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to external force during the wiring connection work, is not attached by the screw member, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from coming off and dropping into the guide passage forming part due to the external force being applied to the external output board.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the attachment frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
Special restrictions to limit the drop in the led passage formation portion (for example, the screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16), which has been moved toward the induced passage to the area around the induced aisle formation unit (for example, the first induced passage section 202) 90, 214, 242, 243) is provided (see Fig. 31 (C), Fig. 32 (A), and 33)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion is a special retaining portion (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of retaining the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moving toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) before reaching the guide passage forming portion, and is provided below the screw member attached to the mounting portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 31(C), 32(A), (B), and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
The special retaining portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth to which part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 31(C), 32(A), (B), and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen on the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIGS. 24, 35, and 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific portion (for example, the ball stopping member 340) can change into a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down, and a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, and the first guide passage forming portion A first state in which the game ball 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming portion 204, and a second state in which the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming portion 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming portion 204 (or difficult to flow down).
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 35).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
a first cover portion (for example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320) provided with retention portions (eg, long holes 316A to 316C, concave grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portions 336) capable of retaining the screw members dropped onto the cover portion;
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, flange portion F) (see FIG. 17).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is attached so as to drop outside the guiding passage forming portion even if it is disengaged from the game frame (see FIG. 17).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member for attaching the storage part is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and even if the screw member for attaching the storage part and the guide passage formation part comes off, it falls outside the guide passage formation part.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
Of the plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (eg, ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (eg, first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (eg, game machine frame 3), a predetermined screw member (eg, screw member N12) near the peripheral portion of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (eg, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 17).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
Screw members (eg, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (eg, ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (eg, game machine frame 3) are attached to metal members (eg, metal plate 222) for reinforcing the game frame (see FIG. 17).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
A screw member (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to a position above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) is characterized by being a different screw member from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In a region below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) of the game board, there is provided an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down (see FIGS. 27 to 29 and 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to rebound and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage-forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guide passage-forming portion from the lower end (see FIG. 38(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
Wiring (for example, cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, recessed portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, cover portion 360 of Modification 1) (see FIG. 38B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
The rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 14 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 14 to 16, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 16, the pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 on which the game board 2 is detachably mounted, a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the game machine frame 3 around the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a square frame-like outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed around the left side. ) by fixing the outer frame 60 so that it can be installed on the game island.

In the upper part of the rear surface of the game machine frame 3, a ball tank forming portion 201 forming a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside a game island (not shown) through a replenishment device 150 (see FIGS. 12 and 13), and a first guiding passage forming portion 2 forming a first guiding passage for guiding the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the left. 02, and extends in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishment device 150 includes a guide member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation path of the game island, a sprocket (not shown) capable of delivering a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guide member 150A, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, a lever switch (not shown) pressed against the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3, When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket can fall into the ball tank forming part 201, and when the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in a closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source, and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number and supplied to the ball tank forming part 201. - 特許庁In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B is fixed at a predetermined location on the game island using a plurality of screw members (not shown).

A second guiding path forming portion 204 forming a second guiding path for guiding downward the game ball guided to the left side by the first guiding path forming portion 202; a payout device 200 constituting a payout portion capable of paying out the game ball guided by the second guiding path forming portion 204; A second passage formation body 207 formed of a formation portion 205 and a ball removal passage formation portion 206 forming a ball removal passage for guiding the game balls guided by the second guide passage formation portion 204 to a discharge portion (not shown) provided at the lower rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 in order to discharge the game balls guided by the second guide passage formation portion 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without being discharged from the payout device 200 to the payout passage formation portion 205 is provided on the left side of the back of the game machine frame 3. It extends in the vertical direction so as to follow.

The payout device 200 consists of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is provided therein with a sprocket for putting out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, a switching valve capable of switching the flow path of the game balls between the payout passage and the ball extraction passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 constantly monitors whether or not there is a game ball to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200 based on the input state of the detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). When the off state of a ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, it is determined that a replenishment error occurs, and the payout operation by the payout device 200 is stopped. In addition, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 can cause the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface of the glass door frame 50 to emit light in an error mode, thereby executing notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 16, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game components (for example, obstacle nails and winning devices) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, an image display device 5 provided on the back side of the plate-like body 2a, an effect device having a movable body 32, electronic parts such as a board case 12A containing the effect control board 12 and a board case 11A containing the main board 11, and the plate-like part, the effect device, and electronic parts. The structure includes a cover body 220 that protects and the like.

The board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material so that each board can be housed therein. Among these, the board cases 11A and 12A are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20 and N21 (see FIG. 12), respectively. It is attached to the game board 2. The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface, and a part of the back surface serves as an opening/closing part 220A that can rotate about the right side, so that the back part of the game board 2 can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, a first passage forming body 203 and a second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 protrude rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 in the upper back of the game machine frame 3, so that when the outer frame 60 of the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied from the circulation path above the game island to the ball tank forming part 201 via the supply device 150.

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 18 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the frame for gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2. On the back surface of the upper side 3A above the opening 221, a reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side, and is mounted on the metal plate 222 by screwing screw members N1 to N5 attached from the back side to the plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction into the plurality of screw holes formed in the metal plate 222. A plate-shaped first projection 224 projects rearward from the right side of the mounting member 223, and a three-dimensional second projection 225 consisting of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C projects rearward from the left side of the mounting member 223.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. The board mounting frame 211 is attached to the mounting member 223 by inserting the screw member N6 attached to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion from the rear side into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B.

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side into the plurality of screw holes formed in the mounting member 223. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the attachment hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage formation body 203 .

The above screw members N1 to N6, N11 ~ N16 are composed of male screw NS and head NH, as shown in the middle enlarged diagram, and the screw members N1, N2, N11 -N16, a frange part with a flange portion f that is formed as a loose and stopped part of the head. It is regarded as a screw member that is less loosened compared to the screw member N3 to N6 by increasing the ground contact area on the seat and increasing the frictional force.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are screws with flanges, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer), but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the first passage formation body 203 is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that game balls supplied from above the game island must be received and stored in the ball tank formation portion 201, and clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the first guide passage, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event of clogging.

A first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 are arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 while overlapping in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls flow from the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the second guiding passage forming portion 204, thereby rectifying the game balls. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the top opening of the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 (see FIG. 36) are left open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, screw members (not shown) for mounting various devices (for example, the replenishment device 150, etc.) arranged inside the game island to the building blocks, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of the various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, fall inside from the non-coated area 350 of the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guiding passage forming part 202, and enter the guiding passage of the game balls. 12 and 13, the replenishing device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. If a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 loosen due to vibration and fall off, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 is extremely high.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side with the game ball flowing down, and finally mix in the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, the ball clogging may occur and the payout motor may be overloaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be paid out to the player together with the game ball, giving the player a sense of incompatibility or disbelief.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described below, various countermeasures are taken to prevent the screw member falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the payout device 200 and causing the payout device 200 to break or malfunction, or to prevent the screw member from being paid out to the player together with the game ball.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. FIG. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 20, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19A. 21, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 22, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 23, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 24, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), (D) is a perspective view showing the third cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing the ball stop member. 25, (A) is a vertical sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an open upper surface by a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is composed of an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the horizontal direction. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming part 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide path forming part 202, and more game balls than the first guide path forming part 202 can be stored. Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, the game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 naturally flow down toward the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction projects from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the mounting piece 261 at the top and bottom. A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front standing wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear standing wall portion 203B (see FIG. 20(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A of the downstream end portion of the first guide path forming portion 202 for dropping a game ball to the second guide path forming portion 204 below.

In the middle of the first guide passage forming part 202, a meandering part 273 is formed in which the game ball flows leftward while meandering in the front-rear direction. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear standing wall portions 203B and the lower portion of the 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and shorter than twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm) (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H even if the screw members N3 to N6 are mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, as will be described later. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the direction in which the game ball flows) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 can be reliably dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the communication hole 272.

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the screw members, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, thereby preventing ball clogging from occurring.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C, the first cover body 310 includes an attachment portion 311 extending along the upper edge of the front standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and having a downward U-shaped cross-section that can be fitted to the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B; It is mainly composed of a plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 extending so as to incline downward (toward the ball tank forming portion 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the standing wall portion 312 toward the left side (toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable formed on the front side of the mounting portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

In the first cover body 310 configured in this manner, the mounting portion 311 is fitted to the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above in a state where the standing wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, whereby a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. ), it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by elastically locking it. In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to incline slightly downward toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 18).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming part 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that even when the game balls supplied from the game island (not shown) to the ball tank forming part 201 are accumulated in a vertical direction, the game balls are held downward by the ball holding part 313 as they flow down to the first guide path forming part 202 side, and are rectified. It is designed to be

Long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed in the cover portion 314 so as to penetrate vertically while being arranged in rows so as to be parallel to each other. The long holes 316A to 316C have the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball and shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. 22B and 22C, when the game ball P falls above the long holes 316A to 316C, the game ball P can move in the flowing direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 23A to 23C, the second cover body 320 mainly includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the cover portion 324. The right end portion of the cover portion 324 is aligned with the left end portion of the cover portion 314 of the first cover portion 310. A plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are attached to the first passage forming body 203 by elastically locking to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 29) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B in a close state. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (see FIG. 18).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1), they are set to a size that can accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged to be inclined downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS.

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 24A to 24C and 25, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding from above between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface. A plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 29) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, and the screw member N15 mounted in the mounting hole H15 is attached to the outside of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing it into a threaded hole provided on the surface. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 18).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed to form a straightening plate 338 that is elastically deformable so that the left end side swings vertically, and an inclined plate portion 339 that is inclined downward toward the right side is formed at the right end portion, so that the vertically stacked game balls P can be pushed toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled while being guided (FIG. 25). reference).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23>2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG.

Further, since the front-to-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a rotating portion 341 having a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in a rear view, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, a left wall portion 341C connecting the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 34 facing in the front-rear direction. 2 and . Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 25 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage-forming body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover part 324 is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall part 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide path forming part 202 are made to flow down and evened out, and finally flow out from the communication hole 272 one by one. In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 25A, the ball stopping member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 is tilted to the right. Positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 so that it can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming portion 202 cannot (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide path forming portion 204. It can be changed to a second state, that is, a ball stopping state.

By putting the ball stop member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide path forming part 204, so that the game ball in the second guide path forming part 204 can be extracted in this state, and the payout device 200 can be removed for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the space portion surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portions in a plan view consisting of the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 tilts, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 26 with reference to FIG. 26, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B).

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 26, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachably connected, and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 12) connected to an external device such as a hall computer are mounted on the back. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to a first number (for example, 20), while each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming part 202, but the number is set to a second number (for example, 10) that is smaller than the first number. .

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown), and the cable C is held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction alternately have different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted on the mounting member 223 by inserting the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B, and screwing the screw member N6 mounted from the rear side into the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223. Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

The inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211 has a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by being engaged with the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically latched from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose forward movement is restricted by the restricting portion 235, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 to determine the arrangement position. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by elastic locking of the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members).

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, it is necessary to operate the operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C during the wiring work for connecting the plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection or the like by a staff member of the game parlor, the cable C suspended from the upper part of the game island may be pulled forward of the outer frame 60 and tension may be applied to the connection part. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is mounted on the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection holes 231 and the operation part 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 26A). Further, since the plurality of operating portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operating portions 233 arranged side by side as will be described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. FIG. FIG. 27 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 28, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 30 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 31, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 30, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 32, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 30, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. 30. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 30. FIG. 35, (A) is a retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), (C) is a retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the second state, and (D) is a UU sectional view of (C). FIG. 36 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 37 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 18, 27 and 28(A), screw members N1 to N2 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine.

Specifically, since the screw members N1 and N2 are separated from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right side and are attached forward from the back side at a position below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and dropped backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 27 is extremely low.

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 27 is extremely low. .

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw member N15 is loosened and falls upward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

The screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 are arranged around the ball tank forming portion 201 which receives and stores the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and is subjected to the load of many game balls, so vibration and impact are likely to occur.

In addition, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are arranged at a position where it is difficult for them to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, below the upper opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, the ball tank forming portion 201 is prevented from entering the sphere tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top for receiving and storing the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged close to (or may contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223, and the gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1), so that the bottom wall portion 203A. and the first protruding portion 224 to be held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, since the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is longer than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounting portion and drops onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 18, 29 and 30A, the first guide passage forming portion 202 and its surroundings are provided with screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222, screw members N6 for attaching the substrate mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, and a third cover body 330 for connecting the first guide passage. A screw member N16 for attachment to the forming portion 202 is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the first guide passage-forming portion 202 to the front side and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage-forming portion 202. A second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage-forming portion 202, whereby each of the screw members N3 to N6 is arranged. However, since the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the rear side, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. expensive.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the screw member N3 is attached to a mounting hole H3 formed in the mounting member 223 forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. At a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a concave groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head NH when mounting the screw member N3 in the mounting hole H3 is linearly extended rearward. The groove 227 is formed so that the left and right widths thereof taper and become shallower toward the rear side, but since the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the rear side, the bottom surface of the groove 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the recessed groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 31(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 dropped into the groove 227 is easily guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear, the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward compared to regions other than the groove 227.例文帳に追加In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, since all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS, when they fall on the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, they are often inclined in a state in which two points, the peripheral edge of the head NH and the tip of the male threaded portion NS are in contact (see FIG. 31(A)). NH sometimes rotates and changes its direction as if it were shaking its head. Therefore, when it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or when it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move backward linearly, or it may move so as to turn left or right as the head NH swings its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 29, if it moves backward and bends to the right, it is more likely to fall onto the first cover body 310, if it moves backward linearly, it is more likely to fall onto the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, it is more likely to fall onto the horizontal wall 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bends rearward to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. As shown in FIG. 31A, when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male screw portion NS is inserted into one of the long holes 316A to 316C, but the head portion NH is locked without falling off. will stay. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C constitute a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member N3 falling onto the cover portion 314 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the recessed groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then moved rearward linearly, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage formation body 203. As shown in Fig. 31 (C), when the screw member N3 falls above the cover part 324, the screw member N3 is inclined so that the male screw NS is intersected against the concave groove 326a to 326c, and the male screw NS and the head NH are stored in the concave 326a to 326c, so the cover part 324. Will be stagnated on the cover 324 without falling in the first induced passage portion 202. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C form a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member N3 falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, it stays in a tilted state on the horizontal wall portion 264. That is, since the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the concave portion 290 is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3, which is the periphery of the first guide passage-forming portion 202, and the first guide passage-forming portion 202, and constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide passage-forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage-forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the screw member N13 is attached to a mounting hole H13 formed in a mounting piece 263 located forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first passage forming body 203. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264 (see FIG. 32(A)). Specifically, since the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, the concave portion 280 smaller than the concave portion 280 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the concave portion 290 opened upward by the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264. It will be accommodated and stayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 32(B), when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls out rearward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13, which is the periphery of the first guide passage-forming portion 202, and the first guide passage-forming portion 202, and constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N13 moving toward the first guide passage-forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage-forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the screw member N4 is attached to a mounting hole H4 formed in the mounting member 223 forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 33).

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, and 33, the screw member N4 falling out of the mounting hole H4 drops from the upper wall 225A from the rear end of the upper wall 211H of the board mounting frame 211, as shown in FIG. The screw member N4 that has dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H may enter the interior through the opening 234 and stay in the concave portion 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or may stay because the male screw portion NS is inserted into the concave portion 243 formed between the board mounting frame 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, but the head NH is locked without falling off. In other words, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage-forming portion 202 and the first guide passage-forming portion 202, and constitute a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 moving toward the first guide passage-forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage-forming portion 202.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 33, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operating portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). In other words, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and constitute a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and bends rearward to the right, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the upper opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not covered by any of the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330. to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side in response to the flowing down of the game ball P, so it falls from any of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and bends rearward to the left and then exceeds the standing wall portion 203B, it falls onto the recessed portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330, so that the screw member N4 does not fall from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is accommodated and retained in the recessed portion 336. In other words, the recessed portion 336 constitutes a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 falling onto the cover portion 334 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the screw member N6 is attached to a mounting hole H6 formed in the board mounting frame 211 forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 34).

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, and 34, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by the plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move rearward linearly, and then, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. 25, the cover portion 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). Therefore, there is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover portion 334 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 35 , the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with a ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower side of the slope, and is restricted from moving downstream (left), thereby remaining on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portions in a plan view, which includes the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D, so that the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the direction of inclination, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. In the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C, so the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted. It is possible to retain more reliably than in the second state. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the screw member N5 is mounted in a mounting hole H5 formed in the mounting member 223 away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front and right side and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, when the screw member N5 is loosened due to vibration or impact and falls backward, it falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but there is a high possibility that it will fall out of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from the upper wall portion 225A before reaching the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

In addition, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, when the screw member N5 is loosened due to vibration, impact, or the like and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N5 will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the screw members N3 to N6, etc. provided above the first guide passage forming part 202 in the game machine frame 3 are loosened due to vibrations or impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off. 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recess 336, and the ball stop member 340 restrict the falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover portions 314, 324, 334 do not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, and there is a high possibility of staying on the cover portions 314, 324, 334. Therefore, the first guide It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming portion 202 from moving and being mixed into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) end portions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves leftward, it can be suitably prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, on the top surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the areas other than the uncovered area 350 are covered with the cover portions 314, 324, 334. However, even if the game balls replenished to the ball tank forming portion 201 spill and land on the cover portions 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the recessed grooves 326A to 326C will not occur. is narrower than the diameter 2R of the game ball P, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover part 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming part 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, not only can the game ball riding on the cover portions 314, 324 be returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also because the game ball P stays in the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or the staying game ball contacts the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls onto the cover portion 334 , it either flows leftward on the cover portion 334 and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340 , or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

Further, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, and the longitudinal dimension L22B is larger than the longitudinal dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 can be prevented from moving and falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

On the other hand, when the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration or impact and fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350 provided between the cover portions 324 and 334, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, they fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350. Even when the game ball P falls directly in the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side in response to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the ball falls from any one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is possible to suppress the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from moving and entering the payout device 200.

In addition, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Between the holes 270A and 270B formed near the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the most upstream hole portion 271A among the holes 271A to 271H, there is a region where no hole portion is formed. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which the ball pressure is applied due to the game balls flowing down from the ball tank forming portion 201 in a stacked state.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this way, it is possible to appropriately prevent the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the inside of the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 15) formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220.

In addition, since the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 are provided at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage-forming portion 202, it is possible to suppress the screw members from falling into the first guide passage-forming portion 202, and to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the first guide passage-forming portion 202 from falling out of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 and entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, since the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, when the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered region 350, the game balls are piled up and down in the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered region 350, so the screw member is often positioned above the game ball. Since it is arranged in a position where it is rectified in one vertical stage, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

In addition, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, even if the screw member enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, even if the game ball falling from the uncovered region 350 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving as the game ball flows down and approaches the hole. Since the probability of dropping from the portions 271E to 271H increases, it is possible to prevent screw members that have dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 31C, 32A, 32B, and 33, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions capable of retaining the screw members N3 to N6 moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the first guide passage forming portion 202 are provided for the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as portions to be attached. Since the screw members N3 to N6 that are provided below and have detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 but have not remained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, and 334, the screw members N3 to N6 that have deviated from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 is such that a part of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, so that the screw members N3 to N6 retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can be easily removed.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recesses 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 not only restrict (or inhibit) the falling screw members from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also allow them to stay outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since it becomes possible to find the screw member, it becomes easier to identify which screw member has come off, so it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

In addition, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has a first state in which the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and a first state in which the rotating portion 341 is positioned in the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 so that it can contact the game ball and the first guide passage forming portion 202. and a second state in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult to flow down) the second guide passage forming portion 204. When the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to stay than when it is in the first state.

More specifically, the ball stopper member 340 is put in the second state when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is inspected or maintained by the staff of the game hall, while the ball stopper member 340 is put in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall staff cannot monitor it. Mixing into the guide passage forming portion 202 can be suitably prevented.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as an anti-loosening portion. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to the vibration and the weight of the game ball, so that the screw members with flanges are made difficult to come off from the game machine frame 3. 0 can be prevented.

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the peripheral portion of the pachinko game machine 1 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, ground wire 226). 0 can be prevented. Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, since the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and since vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw members can be preferably suppressed.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH that does not have a flange portion F and have a small diameter.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28B and 36, in a region below the first guide passage forming portion 202 of the game board 2 detachable from the gaming machine frame 3, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202 so that the falling screw member can flow backward or toward the payout device 200 side. It is possible to prevent the threaded member from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not shown, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward beyond the rear wall of the cover body 220, and the screw members dropped onto the upper wall section 220H of the cover body 220 are guided to flow backward or toward the dispenser 200 side. can be prevented from falling into

Further, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12, and a plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat generated from these driving sources are formed in the upper part of the rear wall portion (see FIG. 15). In addition, the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202 is highly likely to have screw members falling from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H. rear wall, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 38A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and FIG. 38B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 has the first guiding passage forming portion 202 that extends downward toward the left side and the second guiding passage forming portion 204 that extends downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and the second guiding passage forming portion 204 that extends downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. 25, the cover portion 334 of the cover body 330 is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end portion, thereby exemplifying a form in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained. It may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the forming portion 204 .

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen on the cover part 360 move toward the left end side, they do not stay on the cover part 360 and fall directly outside the first guide path formation part 202 from the left end part of the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member N can be prevented from entering the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38(B), in the case where the upper surface of the cover portion 360 is formed with a concave portion 361 capable of retaining the screw member N, the cable CH may be provided in the vicinity of the concave portion 361 in the cover portion 360 so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the screw members include screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, screw members (not shown) attached to other locations of the pachinko game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, replenishment devices) arranged inside the game island. 150, etc.), etc., to the frame or the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be any screw member such as a screw member that has remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install it during the manufacturing of the game machine or maintenance at the game hall. It is preferable that

In the above-described embodiment, the sphere tank forming part 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface formed by the bottom wall part 203A and the standing wall part B is applied as a reservoir capable of storing game media, but the present invention is not limited to this. The front-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in a recessed groove shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B is applied as the guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. can be changed to In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

In the above-described embodiment, the sphere tank forming part 201 as a storage part capable of storing game balls and the first guiding passage forming part 202 having an open upper surface and forming a first guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the sphere tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 are integrally molded. It may be integrally formed by In this case, the screw member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the screw member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member may enter from a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, when the screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204 as well, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the screw member from falling into the second guide passage forming portion 204, a specific restricting portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the second guide passage forming portion 204 to the dispenser 200, or the like may be provided.

In the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover part provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage-forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage-forming part 202 may be covered with the cover part.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, or may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

In the above-described embodiment, the long holes 316A to 316C as holes that allow the screw members to stay on the cover portions, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as recesses are applied as predetermined restriction portions for restricting the screw members falling on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portions of the screw members are applied. A fall control portion (drop inhibition portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the screw member from falling out of the cover portion (or movement inhibition portion), a movement regulating portion (movement inhibition portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member on the cover portion, or a fall guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be used. Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited to the portion that prevents the screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but it is sufficient to make the fall of the screw member difficult.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of holes 271A to 271H are provided in the first guide passage-forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage-forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage-forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 can be restricted (or inhibited). It may be a portion (movement inhibiting portion). The means capable of regulating or inhibiting the movement to the payout device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, etc., and these are preferably provided at positions that do not affect the downflow of the game ball (for example, the corner between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, where the game ball does not contact).

In other words, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 may be any portion that can restrict the movement of the screw member toward the dispensing device 200 side, not necessarily prohibiting the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 side, but also making the movement difficult.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted or impeded) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, there is a high possibility that the movement of the screw member that has been restricted and that remains in the first guide passage will also be restricted, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, and there is a high possibility that a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and visually inspects the state of the game balls in the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 on the back. At this time, since the screw member stays in the first guide passage forming part 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easy for a store clerk or the like to identify that the screw member is the cause of the ball clogging, so that appropriate countermeasures can be taken.

In the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as at least two of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed to allow the screw member to drop, the other holes may not allow the screw member to drop. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 are applied as the first board mounted below the first guide path forming part 202, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal board 210 is applied as the second board mounted above the first guide path forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards such as a relay board may be used as the second board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21 in the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed.

In the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the effect control board 12 are mounted to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21 in the board cases 11A and 12A in which the respective boards are housed, that is, by a mounting method using screw members, and the terminal board 210 as the second board is mounted by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. Although a form in which it is attached to the board attachment frame 211 by a different attachment method has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include locking means such as a latch member, attachment means such as a crimp pin, and adhesion means such as an adhesive.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a special restricting portion for restricting the dropping of the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied. It may be a drop restricting portion (drop inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting (dropping), a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, or a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or moving to the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member, or the like, in addition to the convex portion or concave portion.

In other words, the special restriction portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited to the one that makes the dropping of the screw member into the first guide passage forming portion 202 impossible, but it is also possible to make the fall difficult. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 provided with the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as the special restricting portion is located near the front vertical wall portion 203B. It may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

In the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down and the second state in which the game ball can flow down is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover is not limited to this. As long as it is a member provided on the dispensing device 200 side (lower side of the inclination) in the inclination direction of the portion 334, it may be a convex portion, a vertical wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function.

In the above-described embodiment, the ball stop member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side of the cover portion 334 in the inclined direction, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stop member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific portion (ball stop portion) may be formed integrally with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334.

In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, and N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It also includes the anti-rotation portion of the head NH, adhesives, and the like. Further, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that detaches from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion. Although the embodiment has been exemplified below the upper edges of the standing wall portions 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201, the present invention is not limited to this. If so, the screw member can be prevented from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member may be guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A).

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiment exemplified a mode of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1 but also the screw members other than the pachinko game machine 1, such as game islands, to the payout device 200, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw members N1 to N6 attached to the pachinko game machine 1. , N11 to N16, and screw members N3 to N6 attached to upper positions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201. It is preferable that the size and shape be such that the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 to the dispensing device 200 can be restricted or restricted (obstructed).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, the form for implementing the game machine in the characterizing portion 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 39-1 to 39-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. As the gaming machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board.

As shown in FIG. 39-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches that are used for various settings such as the player's advantage, and detection switches that detect door openings, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the input data that specifies the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is used for the control of the game by the game control microcomputer by being transmitted to the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, a display that displays the value owned by the player, an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that reports the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor that operates a movable part used in the game, such as a reel or a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output parts based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting the output data to the output circuit.

The game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit are performed via a shared data bus.

Also, not all the input circuits are connected through a shared data bus, but some of the input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without passing through the data bus, and the input data from the input circuits to the game control microcomputer are transmitted without passing through the shared data bus.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus, but some of the output circuits may be directly connected to the game control microcomputer without the data bus, and the output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without the shared data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output as an external output signal to an external device, and the external device can use the output data output as the external output signal to inspect the performance of the gaming machine.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following first to third embodiments.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered on the other surface.

FIG. 39-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 39-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 39-2 and 39-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape with a pair of vertically extending short sides and a pair of horizontally extending long sides, and is composed of an insulating printed board. The game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are formed with a plurality of wiring patterns made of conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 39-2, more wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect, the design such as detouring the wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39-3, many of the wiring patterns arranged on the solder surface have wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long sides, so the distance of the wiring pattern is often longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes, so that the wiring pattern at the branch destination is not bypassed or the wiring pattern at the branch destination and the other wiring pattern are not crossed on the same plane.

FIG. 39-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 39-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As described above, on the mounting surface, the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is high, and electronic components equipped with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. By arranging it, it is possible to connect it to the terminal row in the horizontal direction as it is without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

In addition, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape, as shown in FIG. 39-4, and a recessed notch is provided on one of the short sides. As shown in FIG. 39-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 39-4 and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is to the right and the model number is printed from right to left in FIG. 39-4.

FIG. 39-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 39-6 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 39-6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through holes and formed to extend vertically in the vertical direction.

When the game control microcomputer and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the horizontal direction are connected via the data bus, the terminal of the game control microcomputer is first connected to the data bus on the solder surface extending in the horizontal direction, and at the position where the electronic component is mounted, it branches to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through the through hole, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. Moreover, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components. Further, the data bus and the electronic components are connected by the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through holes, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and the noise from the electronic components in between is less likely to affect the wiring pattern.

As shown in FIG. 39-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length (L1 to L8) of each of the divided wiring patterns is formed shorter than the antenna length (λ (bus clock)/2) at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used for data transmission on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is 1/2 the length of the antenna corresponding to the bus clock, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. Therefore, the length of each of the divided wiring patterns (L1 to L8) is formed to a length that does not become 1/2 of the antenna length that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock.

In addition, the bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be mounted, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized according to the bus clock with the maximum frequency assumed among them. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 39-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns constituting a data bus are connected to each other with wiring patterns extending in a diagonal right direction or a diagonal left direction, that is, in a direction different from the direction of the divided horizontal wiring patterns. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 39-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are branched to wiring patterns on the mounting surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 39-6), and the wiring patterns that constitute the data bus are branched using the oblique wiring patterns that connect the plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, and the divided horizontal wiring patterns are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface. Wiring patterns in the horizontal direction may be alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so as to shorten the length. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface.

Figure 39-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 39-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment It is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 39-7 and 39-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39-7, a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc., a low voltage (in this embodiment, Vcc (+5V)) electronic components (low voltage components) to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal is connected are mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low voltage components is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components), such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc., to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected are mounted in the area on the right side where the second ground area is formed, and the ground terminals of the high-voltage components are connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor prevents a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39-7 and 39-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, so that the first ground region and the second ground region are electrically separated. Furthermore, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap, and the insulating area separating the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the insulating area separating the first ground area and the second ground area on the soldering surface are also formed so as to overlap.

Figure 39-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 39-11 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. The wiring from the game control board includes wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to game advantage, such as a signal triggering a lottery, a signal for changing a set value that defines the player's advantage such as a lottery probability, a signal for changing the set value, a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, a wiring for inputting a detection signal for error cancellation operation, and a wiring as a backup power supply line.

As shown in FIG. 39-10, the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, but are connected to the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, as shown in FIG. 39-11. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, connector direction, connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 39-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface through through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 39-10 and 39-11 are through holes to which the terminals of the electronic component are connected, and are provided where the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 39-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion for covering the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in the state where the game control substrate is accommodated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding this area. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the surface, and fraud such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case is prevented.

Further, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and none of the wiring patterns including the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is formed in the area covered by the covering portion. Therefore, an illegal act such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is reliably prevented.

FIG. 39-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode, and the branched line between the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer by stopping the supply of Vcc (+5V), and the game control microcomputer receives the supply of the backup power supply VBB to hold the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

39-14 is a diagram showing a power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 39-15 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment and the power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 39-14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power and wiring patterns VBB that supply backup power are formed as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 39-14 and 39-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 39-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 39-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is formed at a position where it intersects less with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is formed at a position where it intersects less with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. The wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are fewer crossing points than the wiring pattern for transmitting signals not directly related to the history of the player, such as the signal to be played, so that the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal related to the player's profit from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits relatively important signals such as the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that provides the operation clock to the game control microcomputer is formed at a position where the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side is less than the wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a signal of relatively high importance is transmitted from is suppressed as much as possible.

FIG. 39-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board is attached so that the mounting surface side, i.e., the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply is formed, is arranged on the game component side. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 39-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board is attached so that the mounting surface side, i.e., the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply is formed, is arranged on the other game machine side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and in the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, the ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction) is higher than the ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction. According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that when the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, designs such as bypassing the wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized by having a quadrangular shape consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one wiring pattern of the two branched wiring patterns is formed on the mounting surface, and the other wiring pattern is formed on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the branched wiring patterns, or to cross the one branched wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring patterns can be preferably formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects a first terminal (game control microcomputer terminal) and a second terminal (input circuit, output circuit terminal) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific wiring pattern (data bus) used to transmit a specific signal (input data, output data) is formed. It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the signal (input data, output data). According to this configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and each of the straight wiring patterns extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), thereby preventing the specific wiring pattern (data bus) from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected to each other by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). However, the wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the linear wiring patterns extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that a specific wiring pattern (data bus) branches into a wiring pattern different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and another wiring pattern. According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that each linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if the signal is transmitted at a frequency equal to or lower than the maximum frequency.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4) of a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance is not generated due to reflection from the surface of the substrate, so that unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5 V) is transmitted is connected, and a second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V) is transmitted is connected. It is characterized by being connected to the second ground area. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5 V) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+24 V) is transmitted is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulating section (insulating area). .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulating section. The first electronic component may be connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component may be connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulating portion in the configuration in which the difference in current flowing through the wiring patterns connected at and is large. With such a configuration, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area even if the difference in current flowing through the wiring patterns connected to the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large. It is possible to prevent the current from flowing backward.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that a first ground area is formed on one side (left side) and a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern region (insulating region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even if a non-wiring pattern region (insulating region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the soldering surface are formed in respective corresponding areas, and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the mounting surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the soldering surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface, and terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring patterns formed on the opposite soldering surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from being short-circuited or disconnected from the periphery of the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) includes wiring related to the degree of advantage in the game (wiring for inputting or outputting a signal for shifting the set value to a changeable state, a signal for changing the set value, a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and no wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. By displaying the information (connector numbers) about the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on this portion, it is possible to effectively utilize the portions on the mounting surface where wiring patterns are not formed.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case is provided with a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from being short-circuited or disconnected from the periphery of the portions where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. It is characterized by being According to such a configuration, since the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic parts are not mounted, there is no need to form the wiring pattern by detouring the electronic parts, and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, so that it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that a solid ground is formed in an area on the mounting surface side corresponding to an area provided with a wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer has fewer crossing points with the wiring pattern that transmits signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns (Vcc1 to 3) that supply other power supplies. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Although Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game is described, but the configuration according to the present invention may be applied to other boards installed in a game machine, such as a board for controlling effects, a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment.

39-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 39-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 39-18 and 39-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape with a pair of vertically extending short sides and a pair of horizontally extending long sides, and is composed of an insulating printed board. A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

In the game control board of the second embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted in the same way as the game control board of the first embodiment. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape, and have a concave notch on one of the short sides, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed from right to left.

39-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 39-21 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 39-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extending vertically in the vertical direction.

When the game control microcomputer and the horizontally separated input and output circuits are connected via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus on the solder surface extending in the horizontal direction. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is not easily affected by noise from the electronic components. Further, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by wiring patterns branching to the mounting surface side through through-holes, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components between them.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39-22, the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus, so that the game control microcomputer is less likely to be affected by noise on the data bus.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 39-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed in the area near the lower side in the figure of the game control board, that is, in the area near the other side opposite to the one side where the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the connectors CN10 to CN17 for inputting and outputting signals with the external electronic components of the game control board and the data bus.

As shown in FIGS. 39-20 and 39-21, the game control board includes a first input circuit that detects an input signal from a first input component that is relatively less important among input components used for game control (such as a sensor or switch detection signal that does not trigger a lottery), and an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a sensor or switch detection signal that triggers a lottery, a detection signal that changes a set value that defines an advantage, etc.). Based on the output data from the second input circuit, the game control microcomputer, a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, such as a solenoid or a motor, Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game, such as various displays and LEDs, Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, it is mounted on the game control board, and the game is performed for a certain period of time. A third output circuit is mounted for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, such as the payout rate at the time of playing.

Among these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus.

As shown in FIG. 39-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of locations, and is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the vertical direction on the mounting surface. As shown in FIG. 39-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. A wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branched on the mounting surface, and a part of the wiring pattern is directly connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 39-20 and 39-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39-20 and 39-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39-20 and 39-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device is connected to the data bus so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display device (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game other than the performance display device. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through a through hole at the position Q in the figure from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game, and the wiring pattern branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. In this way, the data bus formed on the solder surface is branched to the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes, and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the wiring pattern forming the data bus on the solder surface may be connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. By branching into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for outputting an output according to the progress of a game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the surface and a wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device, it is not necessary to branch to the solder surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each of the wiring patterns connected to a plurality of output circuits, so that the wiring pattern is simply formed.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 39-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position of T in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole again at the position of U, and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important than the input components used for game control, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus, while the second input circuit for detecting the input signal input from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is connected directly to the game control microcomputer without being connected to the data bus and not via the data bus, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component. Since the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted to the game control microcomputer without passing through the data bus, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

(Effect 6)
The game control board of this embodiment has a data bus shared by transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is transmitted from the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data, the input data can be prevented from being affected by noise.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit. It is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer, so that the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. and a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that performs corresponding display, wherein the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit for outputting an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component for displaying the display according to the progress of the game, so that the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. Since the wiring pattern is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal to the first output part which operates the movable part according to the progress, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the display according to the progress of the game.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, when the first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the second ground area where high voltage parts are mounted is formed on the right side, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that performs the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. Since the second output circuit often belongs to low voltage components, it is mounted in the first ground area. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and by mounting the second output circuit in the first ground area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high voltage component, and it is possible to prevent the second output circuit from being overloaded.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. It is characterized by branching to a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting the output signal to an external device. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface is used to branch the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. I can.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a data bus shared by transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. A second input circuit for transmitting to the computer, and a first output circuit and a second output circuit for outputting output signals to the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without passing through the data bus through which the input data from the other input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from the other input circuit and the output data to the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through holes. According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and a data bus is formed in an area near the other side (lower side) opposite to one side of the game control board. With such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display devices, making it difficult to modify the display content by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and needless to say, any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

39-23 is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specific electronic component, as shown in FIGS. 39-23 (A) and (B), fixed terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for transmitting the signal or power of the specific electronic component and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for transmitting the signal or power of the specific electronic component are provided for the purpose of fixing the specific electronic component to the board. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch including both fixing terminals and connection terminals is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, or an electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in FIG. 39-24(A), a normal through-hole is a through-hole that conducts between the mounting surface and the soldering surface by plating copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39-24(B), the specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface.

When soldering to a normal through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 39-24(A), the inside of the through-hole is plated with copper, so the solder in the through-hole flows up to the mounting surface. has become

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so that it is possible to prevent problems such as the solder rising too much to the mounting surface side where the specific electronic component is mounted and the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by the solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, it may not be found. If the model number is hidden in the model test, there is a risk that the configuration of the parts cannot be specified, the test will not be passed, and approval will not be obtained.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of the specific electronic component, no problem occurs even if the electrical connection is weakened when soldered to the specific through-hole. On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not electrically connect the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, so that it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem when the terminal is soldered.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, since terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic component are soldered to the specific through hole, no problem occurs even if the electrical connection is weakened due to the solder not reaching the mounting surface.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic component are inserted into the specific through hole and soldered, but it may be configured such that a terminal (connecting terminal) for propagating the signal or power of the specific electronic component is inserted into the specific through hole and soldered. Trouble can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally include a board on which electronic devices are mounted. For this type of board, it has been proposed to input and output data using one data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic devices. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer), input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) Input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means, thereby preventing the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The substrate (game control substrate) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected to each other by branching wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed through through holes.
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the board (game control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) for outputting an output signal to the performance display device is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit (second output circuit) for outputting the output signal to another display device.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators, so that it is possible to make it difficult to modify the display content by arranging unauthorized parts.

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the board so that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer), input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) Input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit includes a first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a second electronic component (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). and including
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit).
According to this feature, the first output circuit for outputting the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second electronic component for displaying the display according to the progress of the game.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer), input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) Input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) is connected to the data bus through through holes. It is characterized by branching into patterns (wiring patterns connected to external output terminals).
According to this feature, since the wiring pattern on the first surface connected through the through-hole from the data bus formed on the second surface is used to branch to the first wiring pattern for outputting according to the progress of the game on the first surface side and the second wiring pattern for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the second surface to the first surface side in order to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively, so that the wiring pattern can be formed simply. .

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer), input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) Input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
A first input circuit (first input circuit) that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second input circuit (second input circuit) that transmits input data based on an input signal from a second electronic component (second input component) used for control of the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer). An output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer), input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) Input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means, so that the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer), input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) Input circuit for transmitting input data to the control means (game control microcomputer), and an output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern includes a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit,
The output circuit includes a first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer), and a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a second electronic component (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). and including
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit).
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component for performing the operation of the movable part according to the progress of the game, so that the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the display according to the progress of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls are circulated inside the gaming machine. Invention is applicable. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and may be a non-spherical game medium such as medals.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine, but for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value, and one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable, and a prize can be generated according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect , a second suggestive effect , a third suggestive effect , and a fourth suggestive effect as suggestive effects suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
a developed effect execution means capable of executing a first developed effect before the effect result of the first suggested effect is notified, and capable of executing a second developed effect different from the first developed effect after being informed that the control is not performed to the advantageous state as a result of the effect of the second suggested effect;
a chance-up effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect controlled to the advantageous state according to the number of executions during execution of the suggestive effect, with different expectations;
a resurrection special effect executing means capable of executing a resurrection special effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled after the suggestive effect is executed and the effect result is notified that the control is not performed to the advantageous state;
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
It is possible to execute the third suggestive effect after the first development effect is executed ,
It is possible to execute the fourth suggestive effect after the second development effect is executed ,
The chance-up production execution means is
The chance-up performance is executed such that the number of times the chance-up performance is executed when the third suggestion performance is executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up performance is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed,
The chance-up effect is executed so that the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed,
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of the chance-up production including the chance-up production of a specific mode,
When the chance-up effect of a specific mode is executed during execution of the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the suggestive effect,
The first period, which is the period during which the resurrection special effect is executed, is shorter than the second period, which is the period from when it is notified that the control to the advantageous state is not performed as the effect result of the second suggestive effect until the fourth suggestive effect ends,
The revival special effect executing means does not execute the revival special effect when the fourth suggestive effect is executed after the second development effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images